Pioneer SC-1224 AV Receiver Operating Instructions

Add to my manuals
123 Pages

advertisement

Pioneer SC-1224 AV Receiver Operating Instructions | Manualzz

Operating Instructions

AV Receiver

SC-

1224

-K

CAUTION

TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT

REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED

SERVICE PERSONNEL.

D3-4-2-1-1_B1_En

WARNING

This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire or shock hazard, do not place any container filled with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture.

D3-4-2-1-3_A1_En

WARNING

To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment.

D3-4-2-1-7a_A1_En

VENTILATION CAUTION

When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation

(at least 20 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and 20 cm at each side).

WARNING

Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product, and to protect it from overheating. To prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed.

D3-4-2-1-7b*_A1_En

Operating Environment

Operating environment temperature and humidity:

+5 °C to +35 °C (+41 °F to +95 °F); less than 85 %RH

(cooling vents not blocked)

Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light).

D3-4-2-1-7c*_A2_En

CAUTION

The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.

Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the

AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation).

D3-4-2-2-2a*_A1_En

This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes

(such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period.

K041_A1_En

WARNING

Store small parts out of the reach of children and infants. If accidentally swallowed, contact a doctor immediately.

D41-6-4_A1_En

Voltage selector

You can find the voltage selector switch on the rear panel of multi-voltage models.

The factory setting for the voltage selector is

220-230 V. Please set it to the correct voltage for your country or region.

Before changing the voltage, disconnect the AC power cord. Use a medium size screwdriver to change the voltage selector switch.

VOLTAGE

SELECTOR

220 - 230 V

Medium size screwdriver

240 V

D3-4-2-1-5*_A2_En

2

Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly.

Contents

01 Before you start

Our philosophy ....................................................................................................................................................................7

Features ...............................................................................................................................................................................7

Checking what’s in the box ................................................................................................................................................9

Notice in regards to the separately sold Bluetooth ADAPTER and wireless LAN converter .......................................9

Installing the receiver .........................................................................................................................................................9

Loading the batteries ..........................................................................................................................................................9

Operating range of remote control unit..........................................................................................................................10

02 Controls and displays

Remote control .................................................................................................................................................................12

Display ...............................................................................................................................................................................14

Front panel ........................................................................................................................................................................15

03 Connecting your equipment

Connecting your equipment ............................................................................................................................................18

Rear panel .........................................................................................................................................................................18

Determining the speakers’ application ..........................................................................................................................19

Placing the speakers ........................................................................................................................................................21

Connecting the speakers .................................................................................................................................................21

Installing your speaker system ........................................................................................................................................22

Selecting the Speaker system .........................................................................................................................................23

About the audio connection ............................................................................................................................................23

About the video converter ................................................................................................................................................24

About HDMI ......................................................................................................................................................................24

Connecting your TV and playback components ............................................................................................................25

Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder and other video sources ...............................................................27

Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box ...........................................................................................28

Connecting other audio components .............................................................................................................................29

Connecting additional amplifiers ....................................................................................................................................29

Connecting AM/FM antennas .........................................................................................................................................30

MULTI-ZONE setup ...........................................................................................................................................................31

Connecting to the network through LAN interface .......................................................................................................33

Connecting optional Bluetooth ADAPTER .....................................................................................................................33

Connecting an iPod ..........................................................................................................................................................34

Connecting a USB device ................................................................................................................................................34

Connecting an MHL-compatible device .........................................................................................................................35

Connecting an HDMI-equipped component to the front panel input .........................................................................35

Connecting to a wireless LAN .........................................................................................................................................35

Connecting an IR receiver ...............................................................................................................................................36

Plugging in the receiver ...................................................................................................................................................36

04 Basic Setup

How to use the built-in AVNavigator ...............................................................................................................................38

Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) .....................................................................39

The Input Setup menu ......................................................................................................................................................41

Operation Mode Setup .....................................................................................................................................................42

Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language) ................................................................................................42

Changing the TV format setting ......................................................................................................................................42

Changing the frequency step ..........................................................................................................................................43

About the Home Menu.....................................................................................................................................................43

05 Basic playback

Playing a source ...............................................................................................................................................................45

Playing an iPod .................................................................................................................................................................46

Playing a USB device .......................................................................................................................................................47

Playing an MHL-compatible device ................................................................................................................................48

Listening to the radio ........................................................................................................................................................49

Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment of Music ................................................................................................50

06 Listening to your system

Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes ....................................................................................53

Selecting MCACC presets ...............................................................................................................................................55

Choosing the input signal ................................................................................................................................................55

Better sound using Phase Control ..................................................................................................................................55

07 Playback with NETWORK features

Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................................57

Playback with Network functions....................................................................................................................................58

About network playback...................................................................................................................................................60

About playable file formats ..............................................................................................................................................61

08 Control with HDMI function

About the Control with HDMI function ...........................................................................................................................63

Making Control with HDMI connections ........................................................................................................................63

HDMI Setup.......................................................................................................................................................................63

Before using synchronization ..........................................................................................................................................64

About synchronized operations ......................................................................................................................................64

Setting the PQLS function ...............................................................................................................................................64

About Sound Retriever Link and Stream Smoother Link ..............................................................................................64

Cautions on the Control with HDMI function ................................................................................................................65

09 Using other functions

Setting the Audio options ................................................................................................................................................67

Setting the Video options .................................................................................................................................................69

Switching the output (OUTPUT PARAMETER) ..............................................................................................................71

Changing the channel level while listening ...................................................................................................................71

Using the MULTI-ZONE controls .....................................................................................................................................72

Making an audio or a video recording ............................................................................................................................73

Network settings from a web browser ............................................................................................................................73

Using the sleep timer .......................................................................................................................................................73

Dimming the display ........................................................................................................................................................73

Checking your system settings .......................................................................................................................................73

Resetting the system ........................................................................................................................................................74

3

10 Controlling the rest of your system

About the Remote Setup menu.......................................................................................................................................76

Operating multiple receivers ...........................................................................................................................................76

Setting the remote to control other components ..........................................................................................................76

Selecting preset codes directly .......................................................................................................................................76

Programming signals from other remote controls .......................................................................................................77

Erasing one of the remote control button settings ........................................................................................................77

Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function .............................................................................................78

Using All Zone Standby ....................................................................................................................................................78

Setting the switching time of AV amplifier operation mode.........................................................................................78

Resetting the remote control settings ............................................................................................................................78

Controlling components ..................................................................................................................................................79

11 The Advanced MCACC menu

Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu ......................................................................................82

Automatic MCACC (Expert) .............................................................................................................................................82

Manual MCACC setup .....................................................................................................................................................84

Checking MCACC Data ....................................................................................................................................................86

Data Management............................................................................................................................................................87

12 The System Setup and Other Setup menus

Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu...............................................................................................89

Manual speaker setup ......................................................................................................................................................89

Network Setup menu .......................................................................................................................................................91

Checking the Network Information .................................................................................................................................92

MHL Setup ........................................................................................................................................................................92

The Other Setup menu .....................................................................................................................................................92

Making network settings using Safari ............................................................................................................................95

Using Safari to set a friendly name .................................................................................................................................96

Using Safari to update the firmware ...............................................................................................................................96

13 FAQ

Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................................................98

Power .................................................................................................................................................................................98

No sound ...........................................................................................................................................................................98

Other audio problems ......................................................................................................................................................99

ADAPTER PORT terminal ..............................................................................................................................................100

Video ................................................................................................................................................................................100

Settings ............................................................................................................................................................................101

Professional Calibration EQ graphical output .............................................................................................................101

Display .............................................................................................................................................................................101

Remote control ...............................................................................................................................................................102

HDMI ................................................................................................................................................................................102

MHL..................................................................................................................................................................................103

Built-in AVNavigator .......................................................................................................................................................103

USB interface ..................................................................................................................................................................104

iPod ..................................................................................................................................................................................104

Network ...........................................................................................................................................................................104

Wireless LAN ...................................................................................................................................................................106

14 Additional information

Surround sound formats ...............................................................................................................................................108

SABRE DAC

TM

.................................................................................................................................................................108

About HDMI ....................................................................................................................................................................108

HTC Connect ...................................................................................................................................................................108

About iPod .......................................................................................................................................................................109

Windows 8 .......................................................................................................................................................................109

MHL..................................................................................................................................................................................109

Software license notice ..................................................................................................................................................109

Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats ............................................................110

Speaker Setting Guide....................................................................................................................................................110

About messages displayed when using network functions .......................................................................................111

Important information regarding the HDMI connection ............................................................................................112

Cleaning the unit ............................................................................................................................................................112

Pioneer Authorized Distributors ...................................................................................................................................112

Glossary ...........................................................................................................................................................................113

Features index .................................................................................................................................................................116

Specifications .................................................................................................................................................................117

Preset code list................................................................................................................................................................118

4

Flow of settings on the receiver

Flow for connecting and setting the receiver

The unit is a full-fledged AV receiver equipped with an abundance of functions and terminals. It can be used easily after following the procedure below to make the connections and settings.

Required setting item: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 10

Setting to be made as necessary: 6, 7, 9, 11, 12, 13

Important

Using Wiring Navi on AVNavigator of this receiver, you can make the initial settings of the receiver on your computer or mobile device. In that case, you can use Wiring Navi to make the same connections or settings that are performed in Steps 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, and 9. For details of how to use AVNavigator, refer to

How to use the built-in

AVNavigator on page 38 .

1 Before you start

!

Checking what’s in the box

on

page 9

!

Loading the batteries on page 9

j

2 Determining the speakers’ application (

page 19

)

! 7.2 channel surround system (Front height)

! 7.2 channel surround system (Front wide)

! 7.2 channel surround system & Speaker B connection

! 5.2 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surround)

! 5.2 channel surround system & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone)

! 5.2 channel surround system & HDZONE connection (Multi Zone) j

3 Connecting the speakers

!

Placing the speakers on page 21

!

Connecting the speakers on page 21

!

Installing your speaker system on page 22

!

Bi-amping your speakers on page 22

j

4 Connecting the components

!

About the audio connection on page 23

!

About the video converter on page 24

!

Connecting your TV and playback components

on

page 25

!

Connecting AM/FM antennas

on

page 30

!

Plugging in the receiver

on

page 36

j

5 Power On

j

6 Making the initial settings according to the region and environment in which you live

! Changing the TV format setting ( page 42 )

! Changing the frequency step ( page 43 )

! Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language) ( page 42 )

j

7 Using the AVNavigator functions (

page 38

)

j

8 MCACC speaker settings

!

Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC)

on

page 39

j

9 The Input Setup menu (

page 41

)

(When using connections other than the recommended connections)

j

10 Basic playback (

page 44

)

j

11 Adjusting the sound and picture quality as desired

! Using the various listening modes (

page 52

! Better sound using Phase Control (

page 55 )

! Measuring the all EQ type (SYMMETRY/ALL CH ADJ/FRONT ALIGN) (

page 82

! Changing the channel level while listening (

page 90

! Switching on/off the Acoustic Calibration EQ, Auto Sound Retriever or Dialog Enhancement (

page 67

! Setting the PQLS function ( page 64

)

! Setting the Audio options ( page 67 )

! Setting the Video options (

page 69

) j

12 Other optional adjustments and settings

! Control with HDMI function ( page 62 )

! The Advanced MCACC menu (

page 81 )

! The System Setup and Other Setup menus ( page 88 )

j

13 Making maximum use of the remote control

! Operating multiple receivers ( page 76 )

! Setting the remote to control other components (

)

5

Before you start

Our philosophy ................................................................................................................................7

Features ............................................................................................................................................7

Checking what’s in the box ............................................................................................................9

Notice in regards to the separately sold Bluetooth ADAPTER and wireless LAN converter ..... 9

Installing the receiver ......................................................................................................................9

Loading the batteries ......................................................................................................................9

Operating range of remote control unit ......................................................................................10

 

6

01

Before you start

Our philosophy

Pioneer is dedicated to making your home theater listening experience as close as possible to the vision of the moviemakers and mastering engineer when they created the original soundtrack. We do this by focusing on three important steps:

1 Designing with carefully selected components so as to transmit the original soundtrack accurately

2 Allowing for customized acoustic calibration according to any listening area

3 Tuning that transmits soul

Features

Audio

% Class D Amplifier

This unit is an AV receiver developed based on the latest high performance Class D amplifier and integrating the essence of Pioneer’s high sound quality designs. This new generation reference amplifier offers outstanding performance with high sound quality and reproduces the latest in multi-channel digital contents.

% ESS-24bit-DAC-equipped

All channels are equipped with ESS SABRE Premier Audio DACs. The Jitter Eliminators achieve clearer sound.

% Hi-bit 24 Audio Processing

Creates a wider dynamic range with digital sources like CDs or DVDs. 16- and 20-bit PCM as well as compressed audio is requantized to 24 bits, and the high frequency component is interpolated upon data processing to enable smoother, more subtle musical expression.

% Easy setup using Advanced MCACC

The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate surround sound setup, which includes the advanced features of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ.

% Auto Phase Control Plus

For discs created with standards other than Phase Control, the LFE channel is delayed upon recording in the first place. This function automatically corrects phase shifting on such discs and broadcasts. This function is particularly effective when playing multi-channel music containing low frequency effects (LFE).

% Phase Control

Phase Control effectively eliminates phase lag, which makes the sound lack synchronization, and significantly improves the multi-channel sound without any extra operation.

% PQLS Bit-stream

Jitterless high quality playback is possible by connecting a PQLS-compatible player with HDMI connections. This feature is only available when the connected Pioneer Blu-ray Disc Player supports the PQLS function.

Video

% Ultra HD (with 4K/60p video support) - Pass-through and upscaling -

Up to 4K/60p resolution images can be passed through and displayed as such, and the HD (High Definition) or

Full HD images of DVDs, Blu-ray discs and HD broadcasts can be upscaled to a resolution of up to 4K/60p and displayed. A separate monitor supporting Ultra HD (4K video) is required.

% HDMI (4K60p, 3D, Audio Return Channel)

7 in/2 out (As for 2 out; You can select ‘Dual out’ or ‘HDZONE out’) A compatible component is required to use the above function.

Network

% Spotify Digital Music-Streaming Service ready

Spotify is a digital music-streaming service that gives you on-demand access to millions of songs. This receiver is ready for Connect from Spotify, which lets you select songs on your Spotify app to listen to on your audio system.

For service availability in your country check www.spotify.com.

% Compatible with Windows 8.1

This receiver is compatible with Windows 8.1, letting you easily stream music from compatible PCs on your home network.

% Apple AirPlay

With AirPlay you can stream music from iTunes to this receiver and play it through your home theater system.

You can even use the receiver to view metadata including song titles, artist’s names as well as the album art on a connected display. You can easily enjoy your iTunes music in any room in the house.

% DLNA Certified (1.5)

This receiver is a DLNA certified (1.5) device, enabled to work not only as a DMP (Digital Media Player) for playing

DMS (Digital Media Server) audio files, but also as a DMR (Digital Media Renderer) to be controlled remotely by a device such as a smartphone or PC.

% Internet Radio

By connecting this receiver to the network via the LAN terminal, you can listen to Internet radio stations.

 

7

01

Before you start

Connectivity

% Easy Network connection with the Wireless LAN converter

With the AS-WL300 wireless LAN converter, you can enjoy using a wireless LAN connection for the AV receivers.

The AS-WL300 works with the power supply from the AV receiver's dedicated USB terminal, so no AC adapter is required.

% Bluetooth adapter ready

Using the Bluetooth ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or AS-BT200) lets you enjoy music files on an iPhone or other Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device wirelessly.

% MHL

TM

(Mobile High-definition Link)-compatible device playback

An incorporates MHL 2 mobile device can be connected to enjoy 3D videos, full-HD videos, high quality multichannel audio, and photos etc., with charge the battery on the receiver.

% HTC Connect

HTC Connect makes it easy to wirelessly stream your favorite music straight from your HTC phone. There’s no need for a separate app; HTC Connect is built right in your phone’s music player.

% iPod Playback

Your iPod and iPhone can be connected to the receiver’s USB terminal to play the music files on the iPod or iPhone. Also, the iPod or iPhone is charged when it is connected to the receiver.

Playback/Processing

% Multi-channel Music File playback

This receiver enables multi-channel music file playback with a resolution of up to 96 kHz/24 bit. Playback of WAV and FLAC files via the front USB port and network is supported.

% DSD File Music playback (via Network, Front USB and HDMI)

Playback of high sound quality DSD music (DSD files and DSD discs (SACDs)) is supported.

% High Resolution Music Playback

High resolution music files with resolutions of 96 kHz/24 bit to 192 kHz/24 bit can be played. Playback of AIFF,

Apple Lossless, WAV and FLAC files via the front USB port and network is supported.

% Gapless Playback

The silent section between tracks is skipped when playing music files, eliminating the interruptions that usually occur when playing live or concert contents.

This receiver plays back AAC or MP3 format files with a minimum gap even though it is fundamentally impossible to play back without a gap.

% Virtual Speakers

By turning on the ‘Virtual Surround Back’, ‘Virtual Height’, and ‘Virtual Wide’ modes, it is possible to realize a maximum of 11.1 channels combining the speakers that are actually installed and the virtual speakers. This makes for a smoother connection between the sounds and an improved 3D feel.

% dts Neo:X compatible

This receiver supports the latest DTS processing format. The quality of Neo:X, originally designed for 9 channels or more, can be enjoyed in a 7-channel environment.

% Dolby Pro Logic llz compatible

Adding a pair of speakers above the front left and right speakers adds expressiveness in the vertical direction to the previous horizontally-oriented sound field. The height channel strengthens the sound field’s sense of threedimensionality and air, producing presence and expansion.

Installation

% Built-in AVNavigator

When accessing the receiver from the browser of your smartphone, tablet, Windows PC or Mac, you can use

Wiring Navi, which explains how to connect or Interactive Operation Guide, which visually and intelligibly explains the operation method.

% iControlAV5 Remote Application

This is an application that allows intuitive operation of many of the receiver’s functions. This application is available on the App Store for iPhone, iPod touch and iPad. You can also get it on Google Play for Android smartphones. The application can be downloaded free of charge.

% HDZONE output

This receiver supports output of the HDMI output to a subzone room. Powerful images can be enjoyed simply by connecting this receiver to a TV supporting 4K/Full-HD/3D. In addition, a multi-channel environment can be created by connecting this receiver to another AV receiver in the subzone room.

% ZONE Ready

This receiver is equipped with HDZONE and ZONE 2. HDZONE supports HD audio/video streaming to a separate room via HDMI. Multi-Zone enables music and movie playback from different sources in three zones at the same time.

With HDZONE, you can select not only HDMI input but also INTERNET RADIO or iPod/USB and the like.

 

8

01

Before you start

Checking what’s in the box

Please check that you’ve received the following supplied accessories:

! Setup microphone (cable: 5 m)

! Remote control unit

! AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries (to confirm system operation) x2

! AM loop antenna

! FM wire antenna

! Power cord

! CD-ROM

! Quick start guide

! Safety Brochure

Handling the CD-ROM

Precautions For Use

! This CD-ROM is for use with a personal computer. It cannot be used with a DVD player or music CD player.

Attempting to play this CD-ROM with a DVD player or music CD player can damage speakers or cause impaired hearing due to the large volume.

License

! Please agree to the “Terms of Use” indicated below before using this CD-ROM. Do not use if you are unwilling to consent to the terms of its use.

Terms of Use

! Copyright to data provided on this CD-ROM belongs to PIONEER HOME ELECTRONICS CORPORATION.

Unauthorized transfer, duplication, broadcast, public transmission, translation, sales, lending or other such matters that go beyond the scope of “personal use” or “citation” as defined by Copyright Law may be subject to punitive actions. Permission to use this CD-ROM is granted under license by PIONEER HOME ELECTRONICS

CORPORATION.

General Disclaimer

! PIONEER HOME ELECTRONICS CORPORATION does not guarantee the operation of this CD-ROM with respect to personal computers using any of the applicable OS. In addition, PIONEER HOME ELECTRONICS

CORPORATION is not liable for any damages incurred as a result of use of this CD-ROM and is not responsible for any compensation. The names of private corporations, products and other entities described herein are the registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective firms.

Notice in regards to the separately sold Bluetooth ADAPTER and wireless LAN converter

The countries/regions that adopted the optional products below, explained in the Operating instructions, are as per the list.

Optional products

Bluetooth ADAPTER

Wireless LAN Converter

Model No.

AS-BT100

AS-BT200

AS-WL300

Countries/regions that adopted the products

Singapore, Malaysia, Thailand, Australia, New Zealand and Hong

Kong

Singapore, Malaysia, Thailand, Australia, New Zealand, Hong

Kong and Taiwan

Singapore, Malaysia, Thailand, Australia, New Zealand, Hong

Kong and Taiwan

Installing the receiver

! When installing this unit, make sure to put it on a level and stable surface.

! Don’t install it on the following places:

— on a color TV (the screen may distort)

— near a cassette deck (or close to a device that gives off a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound.

— in direct sunlight

— in damp or wet areas

— in extremely hot or cold areas

— in places where there is vibration or other movement

— in places that are very dusty

— in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as a kitchen)

! Do not touch this receiver’s bottom panel while the power is on or just after it is turned off. The bottom panel becomes hot when the power is on (or right after it is turned off) and could cause burns.

Loading the batteries

The batteries included with the unit are to check initial operations; they may not last over a long period. We recommend using alkaline batteries that have a longer life.

WARNING

! Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or performance of batteries.

CAUTION

Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:

! Never use new and old batteries together.

! Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries properly according to the marks in the battery case.

! When inserting the batteries, make sure not to damage the springs on the battery’s (–) terminals. This can cause batteries to leak or overheat.

! Batteries with the same shape may have different voltages. Do not use different batteries together.

! When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public institution’s rules that apply in your country/area.

 

9

01

Operating range of remote control unit

The remote control may not work properly if:

! There are obstacles between the remote control and the receiver’s remote sensor.

! Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the remote sensor.

! The receiver is located near a device that is emitting infrared rays.

! The receiver is operated simultaneously with another infrared remote control unit.

30°

30°

7 m

Before you start

 

10

Controls and displays

Remote control ..............................................................................................................................12

Display ............................................................................................................................................14

Front panel .....................................................................................................................................15

 

11

02

Remote control

This section explains how to operate the remote control for the receiver.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

STANDBY/ON SOURCE

ALL ZONE STBY

RECEIVER

MAIN

BD

SUB ZONE CONTROL

Z2 Z3 HDZ

SOURCE CONTROL

DVD SAT

HDMI

USB iPod

ADPT

BT

ROKU

MHL

NET

TUNER TV CD ALL

VOLUME

TV

INPUT

STATUS

VOL

MUTE

OUT P.

AUDIO P.

VIDEO P.

TOP

MENU

TOOLS

MENU

ENTER

HOME

MENU RETURN

13

14

15

16

6

9

10

LISTENING MODE

AUTO SURR ADV

MPX BAND

CH LV.

PTY

PRESET TUNE

1

4

2

5

3

6

AUDIO

Fav

DISP

7 8

D.ACCESS

CLR

0

DIMMER SLEEP

9 CH

CLASS

ENTER CH

RCU SETUP

11

12

17

RECEIVER

12

Controls and displays

The remote has been conveniently color-coded according to component control using the following system:

! White – Receiver control, TV control

! Blue – Operation of other devices and each input (TUNER, etc.) (See pages

46 ,

47 ,

49 ,

50 and

79 .)

1 u STANDBY/ON

This switches between standby and on for this receiver.

2 ALL ZONE STBY

Use this button to perform unique operations (

page 78 ).

3 MAIN RECEIVER

Switches the remote to control the receiver (used to select the white commands).

Switch to perform operations in the main zone.

4 SOURCE CONTROL buttons

Switches the input. Also, switches remote control operation mode for operating other devices or each input

(TUNER, etc.) (

page 76

).

The input for HDMI , NET and ALL switches each time these buttons are pressed.

5 TV control buttons

These buttons can be used to perform operations on the TV to which the TV INPUT button is assigned. The TV can be operated with these buttons regardless of the input set for the remote control’s operation mode (

page 76

6 Receiver Control buttons

! STATUS – Displays the IP address and information such as selected/set functions and input signals on the display (

page 73 ).

! OUT P. (OUTPUT PARAMETER) – Switches the output terminal of the HDMI signal or speaker terminal to be

played ( page 71

).

! RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen.

! CH LV. (CHANNEL LEVEL) – Press repeatedly to select a channel, then use k/l to adjust the level (pages

71 and

90

).

7 Receiver setting buttons

Press MAIN RECEIVER first to access:

! AUDIO P. (AUDIO PARAMETER) – Use to access the Audio options ( page 67 ).

! VIDEO P. (VIDEO PARAMETER) – Use to access the Video options ( page 69 ).

! HOME MENU – Use to access the Home Menu (pages

41

, 42 ,

63 ,

82 and

89

).

8

i/j/k/l/ENTER

Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround sound system (see

page 82

) and the Audio or Video options (

page 67 or

69

).

9 LISTENING MODE buttons

! AUTO (AUTO SURROUND/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) – Switches between Auto Surround (

page 53

), Auto

Level Control mode and Stream Direct mode ( page 54

).

! SURR (STANDARD SURROUND) – Press for Standard decoding and to switch various modes ( Pro Logic,

Neo:X, etc.) (

page 53 ).

! ADV (ADVANCED SURROUND) – Use to switch between the various surround modes (

page 54

).

10 Source device operation button

Operates other devices or each input (TUNER, etc.).

11 DIMMER

Dims or brightens the display (

page 73

).

12 SLEEP

Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and select the amount of time before sleep (

page 73

).

 

02

13 Remote control LED

Lights when a command is sent from the remote control.

14 SUB ZONE CONTROL buttons

! Z2 (ZONE 2) – Holding down this button (for 1.5 seconds) until the remote control LED flashes one time, the mode changes to Zone 2 operation.

! Z3 (ZONE 3) – It is not used with this receiver.

! HDZ (HDZONE) – Holding down this button (for 1.5 seconds) until the remote control LED flashes one time, the mode changes to HDZONE operation.

15 VOLUME +/–

Use to set the listening volume.

To adjust the main zone sound volume, press MAIN RECEIVER first and then press this button. When in the sub zone, press the SUB ZONE CONTROL button first and then press this button.

16 MUTE

Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).

To mute the main zone sound volume, press MAIN RECEIVER first and then press this button. When in the sub zone, press the SUB ZONE CONTROL button first and then press this button.

17 RCU SETUP

Used to set the remote control (

page 76

Controls and displays

 

13

02

Controls and displays

Display

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

8

AUTO L C

HDMI

DIGITAL

ANALOG

SL

XL XC

LFE

AUTO SURROUND

STREAM DIRECT

PROLOGIC x

ADV.SURROUND

STANDARD

SP AB SLEEP

R

SR

XR

MSTR

DIGITAL PLUS

TrueHD

DTS HD ES 96/24

CD TUNER

DSD PCM

MULTI-ZONE PQLS ALC ATT

S.RTRV SOUND UP MIX iPod

DVD

BD

TV

DVR

TUNED

STEREO

MONO

HDMI

USB

[ 2 ] [ 3 ] [ 4 ]

16 17 18 19 dB

14 15

20

1 Signal indicators

Light to indicate the currently selected input signal. AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input signal automatically (

page 55

).

2 Program format indicators

Light to indicate the channels to which digital signals are being input.

! L/R – Left front/Right front channel

! C – Center channel

! SL/SR – Left surround/Right surround channel

! LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the (( )) indicators light when an LFE signal is being input)

! XL/XR – Two channels other than the ones above

! XC – Either one channel other than the ones above, the mono surround channel or matrix encode flag

3 Digital format indicators

Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format is detected.

! DIGITAL – Lights with Dolby Digital decoding.

! DIGITAL PLUS – Lights with Dolby Digital Plus decoding.

! TrueHD – Lights with Dolby TrueHD decoding.

! DTS – Lights with DTS decoding.

! DTS HD – Lights with DTS-HD decoding.

! 96/24 – Lights with DTS 96/24 decoding.

! DSD – Lights during playback of DSD (Direct Stream Digital) signals.

! DSD PCM – Light during DSD (Direct Stream Digital) to PCM conversion.

! PCM – Lights during playback of PCM signals.

! MSTR – Lights during playback of DTS-HD Master Audio signals.

4 MULTI-ZONE

Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active (

page 72 ).

5 SOUND

Lights when the DIALOG E (Dialog Enhancement) or TONE (tone controls) features is selected (

page 67

6 PQLS

Lights when the PQLS feature is active (

page 64

7 S.RTRV

Lights when the Auto Sound Retriever function is active (

page 67

).

8 Listening mode indicators

! ALC – Lights when the ALC (Auto level control) mode is selected (

page 53

! AUTO SURROUND – Lights when the Auto Surround feature is switched on (

page 53 ).

! STREAM DIRECT – Lights when Direct/Pure Direct is selected ( page 54 ).

! ADV.SURROUND – Lights when one of the Advanced Surround modes has been selected ( page 54

).

! STANDARD – Lights when one of the Standard Surround modes is switched on (

page 53 ).

9 (PHASE CONTROL)

Lights when the Phase Control is switched on ( page 55 ).

10 ATT

Lights when the input signal level is lowered to reduce distortion (

page 67

11 Tuner indicators

! TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being received.

! STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being received in auto stereo mode.

! MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set using MPX.

12

Lights when the sound is muted.

13 Master volume level

Shows the overall volume level.

---” indicates the minimum level, and “+12dB” indicates the maximum level.

14 Input function indicators

Light to indicate the input function you have selected.

15 Scroll indicators

Light when there are more selectable items when making the various settings.

16 Speaker indicators

Lights to indicate the current speaker terminals setting using OUT P. (

page 71

).

17 SLEEP

Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (

page 73

18 Matrix decoding format indicators

! PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate Pro Logic II / Pro Logic IIx decoding (

page 53

).

19 Character display

Displays various system information.

20 Remote control mode indicator

Lights to indicate the receiver’s remote control mode setting. (Not displayed when set to 1.) (

page 93

)

 

14

02

Front panel

1 2 3 4 3 5

Controls and displays

6

6 MASTER VOLUME dial

7 Front panel controls

To access the front panel controls, catch the sides of the door with your fingers and pull forward.

 

INPU

SELECTOR

STA

NDB

Y/ON

ADVANCED

MCACC FL OFF HDMI iPod iPhone

MASTER

VOLUME

7

INPUT

SELECTOR

8 12 13

PRESET

HOME MENU

ENTER

PRESET

HDZONE

ON/OFF

PHASE

CONTROL

RETURN

PHONES

MCACC

SETUP MIC

TUNE

17

9 10

AUDIO

PARAMETER

TUNE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

MULTI-ZONE

CONTROL

SPEAKERS iPod iPhone

DIRECT CONTROL

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

18

11

19 20 21

14 15

22

16

23

MASTER

VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

5V 1 A

STATUS BAND

HDMI 5 INPUT

TUNER EDIT

1 u STANDBY/ON

This switches between standby and on for this receiver.

2 INPUT SELECTOR dial

Use to select an input function.

3 Indicators

! ADVANCED MCACC – Lights when EQ is set to ON in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu ( page 67 ).

! FL OFF – Lights when “off” (nothing displayed) is selected with the display’s dimmer adjustment (

page 73

).

! HDMI – Blinks when connecting an HDMI-equipped component; lights when the component is connected

( page 25

).

! iPod iPhone – Lights to indicate iPod/iPhone is connected (

page 34 ).

4 Character display

See Display on page 14 .

5 Remote sensor

Receives the signals from the remote control (

page 10 ).

15

8 AUDIO PARAMETER

Use to access the Audio options ( page 67

).

9

i/j/k/l (TUNE/PRESET) /ENTER

Use the arrow buttons when setting up your HOME MENU. Use TUNE i/j to find radio frequencies and use

PRESET

k/l to find preset stations ( page 49 ).

10 VIDEO PARAMETER

Use to access the Video options (

page 69

11 MULTI-ZONE controls

If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections ( page 31 ) use these controls to control the sub zone from the main

zone ( page 72 ).

12 SPEAKERS

Use to change the speaker terminal ( page 71 ).

13 iPod iPhone DIRECT CONTROL

Change the receiver’s input to the iPod and enable iPod operations on the iPod ( page 46 ).

14 AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT

Switches between Auto Surround ( page 53 ), Auto Level Control and Stream Direct mode (

page 54

15 STATUS

Displays the IP address and information such as selected/set functions and the input signal on the display (

page

73 ).

16 TUNER controls

! BAND – Switches between AM and FM radio bands (

page 49

! TUNER EDIT – Use with TUNE i/j, PRESET k/l and ENTER to memorize and name stations for recall

(

page 49

).

17 HOME MENU

Use to access the Home Menu (pages

42

,

41

,

63

, 82

and

89

).

18 RETURN

Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen.

19 PHASE CONTROL

Press to switch on/off Phase Control ( page 55 ).

20 PHONES jack

Use to connect headphones. When the headphones are connected, there is no sound output from the speakers.

21 MCACC SETUP MIC jack

Use to connect the supplied microphone (

page 39

).

02

22 iPod/iPhone terminals

Use to connect your Apple iPod/iPhone as an audio source (

page 34 ), or connect a USB device for audio and

photo playback (

page 34

).

23 HDMI 5 INPUT terminal

Use for connection to a compatible HDMI device (Video camera, etc.) ( page 35

).

Controls and displays

 

16

Connecting your equipment

Connecting your equipment .........................................................................................................18

Rear panel ......................................................................................................................................18

Determining the speakers’ application ........................................................................................19

Placing the speakers ......................................................................................................................21

Connecting the speakers ...............................................................................................................21

Installing your speaker system .....................................................................................................22

Selecting the Speaker system .......................................................................................................23

About the audio connection .........................................................................................................23

About the video converter ...........................................................................................................24

About HDMI ...................................................................................................................................24

Connecting your TV and playback components .........................................................................25

Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder and other video sources ...............................27

Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box ........................................................28

Connecting other audio components ..........................................................................................29

Connecting additional amplifiers .................................................................................................29

Connecting AM/FM antennas .......................................................................................................30

MULTI-ZONE setup ........................................................................................................................31

Connecting to the network through LAN interface ...................................................................33

Connecting optional Bluetooth ADAPTER ...................................................................................33

Connecting an iPod........................................................................................................................34

Connecting a USB device ..............................................................................................................34

Connecting an MHL-compatible device .......................................................................................35

Connecting an HDMI-equipped component to the front panel input ......................................35

Connecting to a wireless LAN .......................................................................................................35

Connecting an IR receiver .............................................................................................................36

Plugging in the receiver ................................................................................................................36

 

17

03

Connecting your equipment

Connecting your equipment

This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This chapter explains the kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.

CAUTION

! Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.

! When making connections, also keep the power cords of the devices being connected unplugged from the power outlets.

! Depending on the device being connected (amplifier, receiver, etc.), the methods of connection and terminal names may differ from the explanations in this manual. Also refer to the operating instructions of the respective devices.

Rear panel

HDMI

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

ASSIGN-

ABLE

1

-

6

Y

SELECTABLE

P

B

IN 1

(DVD)

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

P

R

IN

(DVR/

2

BDR)

ASSIGNABLE

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

RS-232C ANTENNA

AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

(DVD)

BD IN IN 2

(SAT/CBL)

IN 3

(DVR/BDR)

SAT/CBL

IN

DVR/BDR

OUT IN

A

R

VIDEO

IN 1

(CD)

L

AUDIO

R

ASSIGNABLE

FRONT

L

CENTER

IN 4 IN 6 MHL

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.9 A MAX)

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.6 A MAX)

LAN

(10/100)

ADAPTER PORT

(OUTPUT 5 V 0.1 A MAX)

DC OUTPUT for WIRELESS LAN

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

OPTICAL PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

1

FRONT

L

ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

R

2

FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE /

R

B

L R

SURROUND BACK

L

(Single)

R

IN 2

(SAT/CBL)

IN 1

(TV)

IN 2

(DVR/BDR)

SURROUND

A

L

AC IN

SPEAKERS

IR

OUT IN

VOLTAGE

SELECTOR

220 - 230 V

240 V

Notes

! The RS-232C terminal is exclusively for the installer.

! The input functions below are assigned by default to the receiver’s different input terminals. Refer to

The Input

Setup menu

on

page 41

to change the assignments if other connections are used.

 

Input function

Input Terminals

Audio

BD

DVD

SAT/CBL

DVR/BDR

HDMI 4

HDMI 5

(front panel)

HDMI 6/MHL

HDMI

(BD)

IN 1

IN 2

IN 3

IN 4

IN 5

COAX-1

COAX-2

OPT-2

Component

IN 1

IN 2

IN 6

TV OPT-1

CD ANALOG-1

18

03

Connecting your equipment

Determining the speakers’ application

This unit permits you to build various surround systems, in accordance with the number of speakers you have.

! Be sure to connect speakers to the front left and right channels (L and R).

! It is also possible to only connect one of the surround back speakers (SB) or neither.

! If you have two subwoofers, the second subwoofer can be connected to the SUBWOOFER 2 terminal.

Connecting two subwoofers increases the bass sound to achieve more powerful sound reproduction. In this case, the same sound is output from the two subwoofers.

Important

! The Speaker System setting must be made if you use any of the connections shown below other than [A] (see

Speaker system setting on page 89

).

! The speakers from which sound is output can be switched according to the speaker layout/usage pattern

(sound is not necessarily output from all connected speakers). Use the OUT P. button to switch the speakers from which sound is output. For details, see

Switching the speaker terminals on page 71

.

[A] 7.2 channel surround system (Front height)

*Default setting

! Speaker System setting: Normal(SB/FH)

FHL

FHR

R

L

SW 2

C

SW 1

SR

[B] 7.2 channel surround system (Front wide)

! Speaker System setting: Normal(SB/FW)

R

L

FWL

SW 2

C

SW 1

FWR

SR

SBR

SL

SBL

This plan replaces the left and right front height speakers shown in [A] with the left and right front wide speakers

(FWL/FWR).

It is not possible to produce sound simultaneously from the front wide speakers and the surround back speakers.

This surround system provides a sound field with good association between the sounds of the different channels.

[C] 7.2 channel surround system & Speaker B connection

! Speaker System setting: Speaker B

FHL

FHR

R

 

L

SBR R

SL

SW 2

C

SW 1

SBL

SR L

A 7.2 ch surround system connects the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right front height speakers (FHL/FHR), the left and right surround speakers (SL/SR), the left and right surround back speakers (SBL/SBR), and the subwoofers (SW 1/SW 2).

It is not possible to produce sound simultaneously from the front height speakers and the surround back speakers.

This surround system produces a more true-to-life sound from above.

SL

SBL

SBR

Speaker B

With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5.2-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback of the same sound on the B speakers. The same connections also allow for 7.2-channel surround sound in the main zone when not using the B speakers.

19

03

Connecting your equipment

[D] 5.2 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surround)

! Speaker System setting: Front Bi-Amp

Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high sound quality with 5.2-channel surround sound.

Front Bi-Amp

L

SW 2

C

SW 1

R

SR

[F] 5.2 channel surround system & HDZONE connection (Multi Zone)

! Speaker System setting: HDZONE

With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5.2-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in HDZONE. (The selection of input devices is limited.)

Main zone

R

L

HDZONE

Sub zone

SW 2

C

SW 1

R

SR

L

SL

 

SL

[E] 5.2 channel surround system & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone)

! Speaker System setting: ZONE 2

With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5.2-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in ZONE 2. (The selection of input devices is limited.)

Main zone

R

L

ZONE 2

Sub zone

C

SW 1

SW 2

R

SR

L

SL

Other speaker connections

! Your favorite speaker connections can be selected even if you have fewer than 5.2 speakers (except front left/ right speakers).

! When not connecting a subwoofer, connect speakers with low frequency reproduction capabilities to the front channel. (The subwoofer’s low frequency component is played from the front speakers, so the speakers could be damaged.)

! After connecting, be sure to conduct the Full Auto MCACC (speaker environment setting) procedure. See

Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 39

.

20

03

Connecting your equipment

Placing the speakers

Refer to the chart below for placement of the speakers you intend to connect.

FHL

L

SW 2 SW 1

C

FHR

R

FWL

60

30 30

60

FWR

120 120

SL

60

SR

SBL

SB SBR

! Place the surround speakers at 120º from the center. If you, (1) use the surround back speaker, and, (2) don’t use the front height speakers / front wide speakers, we recommend placing the surround speaker right beside you.

! If you intend to connect only one surround back speaker, place it directly behind you.

! Place the left and right front height speakers at least one meter directly above the left and right front speakers.

Some tips for improving sound quality

Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.

! The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.

! For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from the TV.

! If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.

! If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a narrower angle.

! Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.

! It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.

! Surround and surround back speakers should be positioned 60 cm to 90 cm higher than your ears and tilted slightly downward. Make sure the speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly behind the listener than for home theater playback.

! Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.

Connecting the speakers

Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to match these up with the terminals on the speakers themselves.

This unit supports speakers with a nominal impedance of 4 W to 16 W.

CAUTION

! These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage. To prevent the risk of electric shock when connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables, disconnect the power cord before touching any uninsulated parts.

! Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal. If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.

Bare wire connections

CAUTION

Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality, but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.

1 Twist exposed wire strands together.

2 Loosen terminal and insert exposed wire.

3 Tighten terminal.

1 2 3

10 mm

Notes

! Please refer to the manual that came with your speakers for details on how to connect the other end of the speaker cables to your speakers.

! Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofer. It is not possible to connect using speaker cables.

! If you have two subwoofers, the second subwoofer can be connected to the SUBWOOFER 2 terminal.

Connecting two subwoofers increases the bass sound to achieve more powerful sound reproduction. In this case, the same sound is output from the two subwoofers.

 

21

03

Connecting your equipment

Installing your speaker system

At the very least, front left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your main surround speakers should always be connected as a pair, but you can connect just one surround back speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left surround back terminal).

Standard surround connection

Front right

The front height terminals can also be used for the front wide and Speaker B speakers.

Front height right

Front height setting

Front wide setting

Front wide right

Speaker B setting

Speaker B - right

Subwoofer 1 Center

Front height left

Front wide left

Speaker B - left

Subwoofer 2 Front left

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

Bi-amping your speakers

Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver and low frequency driver of your speakers to different amplifiers for better crossover performance. Your speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.

Front right Front left

Bi-amp compatible speaker

Bi-amp compatible speaker

High High

 

Low

Subwoofer 1

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

Center Subwoofer 2

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

Low

SPEAKERS

A

R

FRONT

L

CENTER

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

1

FRONT

L

R

2

FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE /

R

B

L R

SURROUND BACK

L

(Single)

R

SURROUND A

L

A

R

FRONT

L

CENTER

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

1

FRONT

L

R

2

FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE /

R

B

L

SPEAKERS

R

SURROUND BACK

L

(Single)

R

SURROUND

A

L

SPEAKERS

A

R

FRONT

L

CENTER

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

1

FRONT

L

R

2

FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE /

R

B

L R

SURROUND BACK

L

(Single)

R

SURROUND

A

L

Surround right

Surround back speaker terminals can be used to connect to the sub zone.

5.2 ch surround setting

Not connected Not connected

6.2 ch surround setting

Not connected

Surround back

7.2 ch surround setting

Surround back right Surround back left

ZONE 2 setting

ZONE 2 - Right ZONE 2 - Left

HDZONEsetting

HDZONE - Right HDZONE - Left

SPEAKERS

A

R

FRONT

L

CENTER

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER FRONT

1

L

R

2

B

L R

SURROUND BACK

(Single)

R

SURROUND

A

L

Surround right Surround left

Surround left

CAUTION

! Most speakers with both High and Low terminals have two metal plates that connect the High to the Low terminals. These must be removed when you are bi-amping the speakers or you could severely damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for more information.

! If your speakers have a removable crossover network, make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping. Doing so may damage your speakers.

22

03

Connecting your equipment

Bi-wiring your speakers

Your speakers can also be bi-wired if they support bi-amping.

! With these connections, the Speaker System setting makes no difference.

CAUTION

! Don’t connect different speakers from the same terminal in this way.

! When bi-wiring as well, heed the cautions for bi-amping shown above.

% To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to the speaker terminal on the receiver.

Selecting the Speaker system

The front height terminals can be used for front wide and Speaker B connections, in addition to for the front height speakers. Also, the surround back terminals can be used for bi-amping and ZONE 2 connections, in addition to for the surround back speakers. Make this setting according to the application.

Front height setup

*Default setting

1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front height speaker terminals.

See Standard surround connection on page 22

.

2 If necessary, select ‘Normal(SB/FH)’ from the Speaker System menu.

See Speaker system setting

on

page 89 to do this.

Front wide setup

1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front height speaker terminals.

See Standard surround connection on page 22

.

2 Select ‘Normal(SB/FW)’ from the Speaker System menu.

See Speaker system setting

on

page 89 to do this.

Speaker B setup

You can listen to stereo playback in another room.

1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front height speaker terminals.

See Standard surround connection on page 22

.

2 Select ‘Speaker B’ from the Speaker System menu.

See Speaker system setting

on

page 89 to do this.

Bi-Amping setup

Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high sound quality with 5.1-channel surround sound.

1 Connect bi-amp compatible speakers to the front and surround back speaker terminals.

See Bi-amping your speakers on page 22 .

2 Select ‘Front Bi-Amp’ from the Speaker System menu.

See Speaker system setting on page 89 to do this.

ZONE 2 setup

With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in ZONE 2.

1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back speaker terminals.

See Standard surround connection on page 22

.

2 Select ‘ZONE 2’ from the Speaker System menu.

See Speaker system setting on page 89 to do this.

 

HDZONE setup

With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in HDZONE.

1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back speaker terminals.

See Standard surround connection on page 22

.

2 Select ‘HDZONE’ from the Speaker System menu.

See Speaker system setting on page 89 to do this.

About the audio connection

Types of cables and terminals

HDMI

Transferable audio signals

HD audio

Digital (Coaxial)

Digital (Optical)

RCA (Analog)

(White/Red)

Conventional digital audio

Conventional analog audio

! With an HDMI cable, video and audio signals can be transferred in high quality over a single cable.

! For HD audio, see

About HDMI

on

page 24

.

23

03

Connecting your equipment

About the video converter

The video converter ensures that all video sources are output through the HDMI OUT terminal.

If the TV is only connected to the receiver’s composite VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, all the other video devices must be connected through composite connections.

If several video components are assigned to the same input function (see

The Input Setup menu on page 41

), the converter gives priority to HDMI, component, then composite (in that order).

Terminal for connection with source device

Terminal for connection with TV monitor

HDMI IN

Y P

B

P

R

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

VIDEO IN

HDMI OUT

Y P

B

P

R

COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

Video signals can be output

Notes

! With factory default settings, video from the video cable or component cable will not be output from the HDMI terminal. To output video, you must switch video input to the device connected with the video cable or compo-

nent cable and set V.CONV to ON ( page 69 ).

! The only exception is HDMI: since this resolution cannot be downsampled, you must connect your monitor/TV to the receiver’s HDMI output when connecting this video source.

! If the video signal does not appear on your TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in

Setting the Video options

on

page 69 ) OFF.

! The signal input resolutions that can be converted from the component video input for the HDMI output are

480i/576i, 480p/576p, 720p and 1080i. 1080p signals cannot be converted.

This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.

About HDMI

The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio.

This receiver incorporates High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI ® / TM ) technology.

This receiver supports the functions described below through HDMI connections.

! Digital transfer of uncompressed video (contents protected by HDCP (1080p/24, 1080p/60, etc.))

! 3D signal transfer

! Deep Color signal transfer

! x.v.Color signal transfer

! ARC (Audio Return Channel)

! 4K signal transfer

— This may not operate properly, depending on the connected equipment.

— 4K 24p, 4K 25p, 4K 30p, 4K 50p and 4K 60p signals are supported.

! Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital audio signals (192 kHz or less) for up to 8 channels

! Input of the following digital audio formats:

— Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS, High bitrate audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD

High Resolution Audio), CD, SACD (DSD signal)

! Synchronized operation with components using the Control with HDMI function (see

Control with HDMI function on page 62

)

 

Notes

! An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High

Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVI dHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.

! If you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP, an HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front panel display. Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction.

! Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers.

! This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these formats, however, make sure that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corresponding format.

! Use a High Speed HDMI ®

/

TM

Cable. If an HDMI cable other than a High Speed HDMI

®

/

TM

Cable is used, it may not work properly.

! When an HDMI cable with a built-in equalizer is connected, it may not operate properly.

! Signal transfer is only possible when connected to a compatible component.

! HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer time to be recognized. Due to this, interruption in the audio may occur when switching between audio formats or beginning playback.

! Turning on/off the device connected to this unit’s HDMI OUT terminal during playback, or disconnecting/connecting the HDMI cable during playback, may cause noise or interrupted audio.

The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and other countries.

“x.v.Color” and are trademarks of Sony Corporation.

24

03

Connecting your equipment

Connecting your TV and playback components

Connecting using HDMI

If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component (Blu-ray Disc player (BD), etc.), you can connect it to this receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable.

If the TV and playback components support the Control with HDMI feature, the convenient Control with HDMI functions can be used (see

Control with HDMI function on page 62 ).

HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor

HDMI/DVI-compatible

Blu-ray Disc player

Other HDMI/DVIequipped component

This connection is required in order to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver.

! When connecting to an HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor using the HDMI OUT 2 terminal, switch the HDMI output setting to OUT 2 or OUT 1+2. See

Switching the HDMI output on page 71

.

Also,

page 94

).

! For input components, connections other than HDMI connections are also possible (see Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output on page 26 ).

! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio cables.

— When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC (Audio

Return Channel) function, the sound of the TV can be input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT terminal, so

there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set ARC at HDMI Setup to ON (see HDMI Setup

on

page 63 ).

After setting the ARC, some time may be required for the connected device to be recognized and the sound to be produced.

— If you use a coaxial digital audio cable or RCA (analog) audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digi-

tal or analog audio input you connected the TV to (see The Input Setup menu on page 41 ).

— Please refer to the TV’s operation manual for directions on connections and setup for the TV.

 

HDMI OUT HDMI OUT

R

AUDIO OUT

ANALOG L

Select one

DIGITAL OUT

OPTICAL COAXIAL

HDMI IN

HDMI

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

ASSIGN-

ABLE

1 - 6

SELECTABLE

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

IN 1

(DVD)

BD IN IN 2

(SAT/CBL)

IN 3

(DVR/BDR)

IN 4

IN 1

(CD)

IN 6 MHL

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.9 A MAX)

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.6 A MAX)

LAN

(10/100)

DC OUTPUT for WIRELESS LAN

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

IN 2

(SAT/CBL)

IN 1

(TV)

IN 2

(DVR/BDR)

HDMI

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

ASSIGN-

ABLE

1 - 6 SELECTABLE

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

IN 1

(DVD)

BD IN IN 2

(SAT/CBL)

IN 3

(DVR/BDR)

IN 4 IN 6 MHL

LAN (10/100)

DC OUTPUT

COAXIAL

IN

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

1

(TV)

2

(DVR/BDR)

ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

25

03

Connecting your equipment

Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output

This diagram shows connections of a TV (with HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component with no

HDMI output) to the receiver.

HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor

DVD player, etc.

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

Select one

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

Y

P

B

P

R

R

AUDIO OUT

ANALOG

L

Select one

DIGITAL OUT

OPTICAL COAXIAL

Connecting your TV with no HDMI input

This diagram shows connections of a TV (with no HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component) to the receiver.

 

Important

! With these connections, the picture is not output to the TV even if the DVD player is connected with an HDMI cable. Connect the receiver and TV using the same type of video cable as used to connect the receiver and player.

! Also, when the receiver and TV are connected by anything other than an HDMI cable, the OSD function allowing display of the receiver’s settings, operations, etc., on the TV’s screen cannot be used. In this case, watch the receiver’s front panel display while performing the various operations and making settings.

HDMI IN

DVD player, etc.

TV

Select one

COMPONENT VIDEO IN

Y P

B

P

R

VIDEO IN

VIDEO

Select one

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

Y P

B

P

R

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

HDMI OUT

Select one

DIGITAL OUT

OPTICAL COAXIAL

R

AUDIO OUT

ANALOG

L

HDMI

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

ASSIGN-

ABLE

1

-

6

Y

SELECTABLE

P

B

IN

1

(DVD)

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

P

R

IN 2

(DVR/

BDR)

ASSIGNABLE

MONITOR

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

IN 1

(DVD)

BD IN

DVR/BDR

OUT IN

IN 2

(SAT/CBL)

IN 3

(DVR/BDR)

IN 4 IN 6 MHL

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.9 A MAX)

HDMI

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

ASSIGN-

ABLE

1 - 6 SELECTABLE

PB

IN 1

(DVD)

IN

BDR)

2

ASSIGNABLE

Y

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

PR

MONITOR

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

IN 1

(DVD)

BD IN IN 2

(SAT/CBL)

IN 3

(DVR/BDR)

IN 4 IN 6 MHL

DVR/BDR

OUT IN

LAN (10/100)

COAXIAL

IN

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(TV)

1

IN 2

(DVR/BDR)

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.6 A MAX)

LAN

(10/100)

DC OUTPUT for WIRELESS LAN

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

IN 2

(SAT/CBL)

IN 1

(TV)

IN 2

(DVR/BDR)

! With factory default settings, video from the video cable or component cable will not be output from the HDMI terminal. To output video, you must switch video input to the device connected with the video cable or compo-

nent cable and set V.CONV to ON ( page 69 ).

! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio cables

( page 25 ).

— When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC (Audio

Return Channel) function, the sound of the TV can be input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT 1 terminal, so

there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set ARC at HDMI Setup to ON (see HDMI Setup on page 63

).

! If you use an optical digital audio cable or RCA (analog) audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digi-

tal input you connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 41 ).

! If HDZONE is set to on, video images connected using a video cable or component cable are not output from the HDMI terminal. To output video images, turn HDZONE off (

page 72

).

26

HDMI

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

ASSIGN-

ABLE

1 - 6

Y

SELECTABLE

P

B

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

P

R

IN 1

(DVD)

IN 2

(DVR/

BDR)

ASSIGNABLE

MONITOR

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

IN 1

(DVD)

COMPONENT VIDEO

BD IN

DVR/BDR

OUT IN

IN 2

(SAT/CBL)

IN 3

(DVR/BDR)

IN 4 IN 6 MHL

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.9 A MAX)

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.6 A MAX)

LAN

(10/100)

DC OUTPUT for WIRELESS LAN

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

IN 2

(SAT/CBL)

IN 1

(TV)

IN 2

(DVR/BDR)

HDMI

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

ASSIGN-

ABLE

1 - 6 SELECTABLE

PB

IN 1

(DVD)

IN

BDR)

2

ASSIGNABLE

Y

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

PR MONITOR

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

IN 1

(DVD)

BD IN

DVR/BDR

OUT IN

IN 2

(SAT/CBL)

3

(DVR/BDR)

IN 4 IN 6 MHL

LAN (10/100)

COAXIAL

IN

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1

(TV)

IN 2

(DVR/BDR)

03

Connecting your equipment

! In order to listening to HD audio with this receiver, connect an HDMI cable, and use analog video cable for video signal input.

Depending on the player, it may not be possible to output video signals to both HDMI and other video output

(composite, etc.) simultaneously, and it may be necessary to make video output settings. Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with your player for more information.

! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio cables

( page 25 ).

! If you use an optical digital audio cable or RCA (analog) audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digi-

tal input you connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 41 ).

Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder and other video sources

This receiver has audio/video inputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video devices, including HDD/DVD recorders and BD recorders.

When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to (see also

The Input Setup menu on page 41

).

HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder, etc.

! If your HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder, etc., is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, we recommend connecting it to the receiver’s HDMI DVR/BDR IN terminal. When doing so, also connect the receiver and TV by

HDMI (see

Connecting using HDMI on page 25 ).

HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder, etc.

HDMI OUT

HDMI IN

 

HDMI

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

ASSIGN-

ABLE

1

-

6

SELECTABLE

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

IN

1

(DVD)

BD IN IN

2

(SAT/CBL)

IN

3

(DVR/BDR)

IN

4

IN

6

MHL

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.9 A MAX)

HDMI

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

ASSIGN-

ABLE

1 - 6

SELECTABLE

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

BD IN IN 4 IN 6 MHL

R

AUDIO IN

ANALOG L

VIDEO IN

VIDEO

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

R

AUDIO OUT

ANALOG L

Select one

DIGITAL OUT

OPTICAL COAXIAL

HDMI

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

ASSIGN-

ABLE

1 - 6

SELECTABLE

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

IN 1

(DVD)

BD IN IN 2

(SAT/CBL)

IN 3

(DVR/BDR)

IN 4

DVR/BDR

OUT IN

IN 6 MHL

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.9 A MAX)

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.6 A MAX)

LAN

(10/100)

DC OUTPUT for WIRELESS LAN

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

IN 2

(SAT/CBL)

IN 1

(TV)

IN 2

(DVR/BDR)

HDMI

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

ASSIGN-

ABLE

1 - 6 SELECTABLE

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

IN 1

(DVD)

BD IN IN 2

(SAT/CBL)

IN 3

(DVR/BDR)

IN 4 IN 6 MHL

DVR/BDR

OUT IN

LAN (10/100)

COAXIAL

IN 1

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(TV)

1

IN 2

(DVR/BDR)

! In order to record, you must connect the analog audio cables (the digital connection is for playback only) ( page

73

).

27

03

Connecting your equipment

Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box

Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’.

When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top box to (see

The

Input Setup menu on page 41

).

STB

! If your set-top box is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, we recommend connecting it to the receiver’s

HDMI SAT/CBL IN terminal. When doing so, also connect the receiver and TV by HDMI (see

Connecting using

HDMI

on

page 25

).

HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor

STB

HDMI OUT

HDMI IN

 

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

R

AUDIO OUT

ANALOG

L

Select one

DIGITAL OUT

OPTICAL COAXIAL

HDMI

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

ASSIGN-

ABLE

1

-

6

SELECTABLE

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

IN 1

(DVD)

BD IN IN 2

(SAT/CBL)

IN 3

(DVR/BDR)

IN 4 IN 6 MHL

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.9 A MAX)

HDMI

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

ASSIGN-

ABLE

1 -

SELECTABLE

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

BD IN IN 4 IN 6 MHL

0.9 A MAX)

HDMI

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

ASSIGN-

ABLE

1 - 6

SELECTABLE

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

BD IN IN 4 IN 6 MHL

0.9 A MAX)

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.6 A MAX)

LAN (10/100) DC OUTPUT

IN 1

(DVD)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

2

(SAT/CBL)

IN

(TV)

HDMI

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

ASSIGN-

ABLE

1 - 6

SELECTABLE

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

IN 1

(DVD)

BD IN IN 2

(SAT/CBL)

IN 3

(DVR/BDR)

IN 4

SAT/CBL

IN

IN 6 MHL

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.9 A MAX)

LAN

(10/100)

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.6 A MAX)

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

IN 2

(SAT/CBL)

IN 1

(TV)

IN 2

(DVR/BDR)

! Even if your set-top box is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, in some cases the sound is output from the digital audio output (optical or coaxial) and only the video is output from the HDMI output terminal. In this case, make the HDMI and digital audio connections as shown below.

HDMI OUT

STB

Select one

DIGITAL OUT

OPTICAL COAXIAL

! With factory default settings, video from the video cable or component cable will not be output from the HDMI terminal. To output video, you must switch video input to the device connected with the video cable or compo-

nent cable and set V.CONV to ON ( page 69 ).

! If HDZONE is set to on, video images connected using a video cable or component cable are not output from the HDMI terminal. To output video images, turn HDZONE off (

page 72

).

HDMI

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

ASSIGN-

ABLE

1 - 6

SELECTABLE

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

HDMI IN

IN 1

(DVD)

BD IN IN 2

(SAT/CBL)

IN 3

(DVR/BDR)

IN 4

HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor

IN 6 MHL

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.9 A MAX)

LAN

(10/100)

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.6 A MAX)

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

IN 2

(SAT/CBL)

IN 1

(TV)

IN 2

(DVR/BDR)

HDMI

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

ASSIGN-

ABLE

1 - 6 SELECTABLE

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

IN 1

(DVD)

BD IN IN 2

(SAT/CBL)

3

(DVR/BDR)

IN 4 IN 6 MHL

LAN (10/100)

COAXIAL

IN

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1

(TV)

IN 2

(DVR/BDR)

— If you use a digital audio cable or RCA (analog) audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digital input

you connected the set-top box to (see The Input Setup menu on page 41 ).

28

03

Connecting other audio components

This receiver has both digital and analog inputs, allowing you to connect audio components for playback.

When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to (see also

The Input Setup menu on page 41

).

CD player, etc.

R

AUDIO OUT

ANALOG L

Select one

DIGITAL OUT

OPTICAL COAXIAL

Connecting your equipment

Connecting additional amplifiers

This receiver has more than enough power for any home use, but it’s possible to add additional amplifiers to every channel of your system using the pre-outs. Make the connections shown below to add amplifiers to power your speakers.

 

ANALOG

INPUT

L

R

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

1

FRONT

L

R

2

Front channel amplifier

ANALOG

INPUT

Powered subwoofer 2

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

1

FRONT

L

Powered subwoofer 1

R

2

HDMI

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

ASSIGN-

ABLE

1

-

6

SELECTABLE

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

HDMI

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

ASSIGN-

ABLE

1 - 6

SELECTABLE

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

BD IN

ASSIGNABLE

IN 6 MHL

0.9 A MAX)

LAN (10/100) DC OUTPUT

COAXIAL

IN

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1

(DVD)

BD IN IN 2

(SAT/CBL)

IN 3

(DVR/BDR)

IN 4

IN 1

(CD)

IN 6 MHL

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.9 A MAX)

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.6 A MAX)

LAN

(10/100)

DC OUTPUT for WIRELESS LAN

COAXIAL

IN 1

(DVD)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

IN 2

(SAT/CBL)

IN 1

(TV)

IN 2

(DVR/BDR)

ASSIGNABLE

! If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the ANALOG IN 1

(CD) inputs instead.

! If you’re not using a subwoofer, change the front speaker setting (see

Speaker Setting

on

page 86 ) to

LARGE.

! You can use the additional amplifier on the surround back channel pre-outs for a single speaker as well. In this case plug the amplifier into the left (SURROUND BACK L (Single)) terminal only.

! The sound from the surround back terminals will depend on how you have configured the

Speaker system setting

on

page 89

.

! If you have two subwoofers, the second subwoofer can be connected to the SUBWOOFER 2 terminal.

Connecting two subwoofers increases the bass sound to achieve more powerful sound reproduction. In this case, the same sound is output from the two subwoofers.

! To hear sound only from the pre-outs, switch the speaker terminals to SP: OFF ( page 71 ) or simply discon-

nect any speakers that are connected directly to the receiver.

29

03

Connecting your equipment

Connecting AM/FM antennas

Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire antenna as shown below. To improve reception and sound quality, connect external antennas (see

Connecting external antennas

on

page 30

).

a b c

Connecting external antennas

To improve FM reception, connect an external FM antenna to FM UNBAL 75 W.

75 Ω coaxial cable

3

5

1 2

4

ANTENNA

AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75

ANTENNA

AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75

ANTENNA

AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75

To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m length of vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP terminals without disconnecting the supplied AM loop antenna.

For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally outdoors.

ANTENNA

AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75

Outdoor antenna

ANTENNA

AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75

1 Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna wires.

2 Push open the tabs, then insert one wire fully into each terminal, then release the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires.

3 Fix the AM loop antenna to the attached stand.

To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the direction indicated by the arrow (fig. a) then clip the loop onto the stand (fig. b).

! If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a wall or other surface, secure the stand with screws (fig. c) before clipping the loop to the stand. Make sure the reception is clear.

4 Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and in a direction giving the best reception.

5 Connect the FM wire antenna into the FM antenna socket.

For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.

Indoor antenna

(vinyl-coated wire)

5 m to 6 m

ANTENNA

AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75

 

30

03

Connecting your equipment

MULTI-ZONE setup

This receiver can power up to three independent systems in separate rooms after you have made the proper

MULTI-ZONE connections.

Different sources can be playing in three zones at the same time or, depending on your needs, the same source can also be used. The main and sub zones have independent power (the main zone power can be off while one (or both) of the sub zones is on) and the sub zones can be controlled by the remote or front panel controls.

Making MULTI-ZONE connections

It is possible to make these connections if you have separate speakers for your primary (ZONE 2) sub zone. You will also need a separate amplifier if you are not using the speaker terminals for your primary sub zone (For detail,

see MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2) on page 31

).

Also, if the separate receiver in the sub zone has an HDMI input terminal, this unit’s HDMI input can be played as

HDZONE.

Here are two primary sub zone setups possible with this system. Choose whichever works best for you.

Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 2)

% Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT jacks on this receiver.

You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration.

Sub zone (ZONE 2) Main zone

R

AUDIO IN

L

ZONE 2

OUT

Important

! The settings must be changed at ZONE Setup in order to use the multi-zone function (

page 94

).

! MAIN/HDZONE at ZONE Setup must be set to HDZONE in order to use the HDZONE function (

page 94 ).

MULTI-ZONE listening options

The following table shows the signals that can be output to ZONE 2 and HDZONE:

Sub Zone

ZONE 2

<a>

HDZONE

(HDMI)

<b>

Input functions available

DVD, SAT/CBL, INTERNET RADIO, MEDIA SERVER, FAVORITES, iPod/USB, TV, CD,

TUNER, ADAPTER PORT

(Outputs analog audio)

BD, DVD, SAT/CBL, DVR/BDR, INTERNET RADIO, MEDIA SERVER, FAVORITES, iPod/

USB, HDMI 1, HDMI 2, HDMI 3, HDMI 4, HDMI 5, HDMI 6/MHL

(Outputs HDMI audio and video signals) a It is not possible to down-convert the audio input signal from the HDMI input terminals or digital input terminals (OPTICAL and

COAXIAL) and output them to ZONE 2.

b ! The inputs that can be switched differ according to how terminals HDMI IN 1 to IN 6 are assigned. Upon shipment from the factory, the input terminals are assigned to DVD, SAT/CBL, DVR/BDR, HDMI 4, HDMI 5 and HDMI 6/MHL, in order starting from terminal HDMI IN 1.

! The video/audio signals of the RCA analog input terminals, the digital input terminals (OPTICAL and COAXIAL) and the COM-

PONENT VIDEO input terminals cannot be up-converted and output to the HDZONE.

! When any of the HDMI 3 to HDMI 6/MHL inputs is selected in the main zone, it is only possible to select the same input as in the main zone for the HDZONE. (Inputs other than the ones listed here can be selected.)

The same limitations apply when one of the above inputs is selected for the HDZONE.

MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2)

You must select ZONE 2 in Speaker system setting ( page 89

) to use this setup.

% Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back speaker terminals.

You should have a pair of speakers attached to the surround back speaker terminals as shown below.

Sub zone (ZONE 2) Main zone

L R

R

SURROUND BACK

L

(Single)

R

SURROUND BACK

L

(Single)

Note

When any of the INTERNET RADIO, MEDIA SERVER, FAVORITES, iPod/USB or ADAPTER PORT inputs is selected in the main zone, it is only possible to select the same input as in the main zone for the sub zone. (Inputs other than the ones listed here can be selected.)

The same limitations apply when one of the above inputs is selected for the sub zone.

 

31

03

MULTI-ZONE setup using HDMI terminal (HDZONE)

Important

! The settings must be changed at ZONE Setup in order to use the HDZONE function (

page 94

).

! To use the HDZONE functions, set Control or Control Mode in HDMI Setup to OFF. For details, see

HDMI

Setup on page 63 .

% Connect a separate receiver to the HDMI OUT 2 (HDZONE) terminal on this receiver.

Connect speakers and a TV to the HDZONE receiver as shown on the illustration below.

Sub zone (HDZONE) Main zone

Connecting your equipment

Multi-zone connection using the HDMI terminal and speaker terminals (HDZONE)

Important

! The settings must be changed at ZONE Setup in order to use the HDZONE function (

page 94 ).

! To use the HDZONE functions, set Control or Control Mode in HDMI Setup to OFF. For details, see

HDMI

Setup on page 63

.

! You must select HDZONE in

Speaker system setting ( page 89

) to use this setup.

1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back speaker terminals.

You should have a pair of speakers attached to the surround back speaker terminals as shown below.

2 Connect a TV monitor to the HDMI OUT 2 (HDZONE) terminal on this receiver.

Sub zone (HDZONE) Main zone

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

SELECTABLE

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

HDMI IN

2

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

R

SURROUND BACK

L

(Single)

SELECTABLE

 

HDMI IN

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

SELECTABLE

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

SELECTABLE

L R

R

SURROUND BACK

L

(Single)

1

32

03

Connecting your equipment

Connecting to the network through LAN interface

By connecting this receiver to the network via the LAN terminal, you can listen to Internet radio stations. To listen to Internet radio stations, you must sign a contract with an ISP (Internet Service Provider) beforehand.

When connected in this way, you can play audio files stored on the components on the local network, including your computer.

Connecting optional Bluetooth ADAPTER

When the Bluetooth

®

ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or AS-BT200) is connected to this receiver, a product equipped with

Bluetooth wireless technology (portable cell phone, digital music player, etc.) can be used to listen to music wirelessly.

! The Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device must support A2DP profiles.

! Pioneer does not guarantee proper connection and operation of this unit with all Bluetooth wireless technology enabled devices.

 

LAN (10/100)

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.6 A MAX)

LAN

(10/100)

DC OUTPUT for WIRELESS LAN

Internet

Modem

Bluetooth® ADAPTER

ADAPTER PORT

(OUTPUT 5 V 0.1 A MAX)

NAS to LAN port

Computer

LAN

3 2 1

WAN

Router

LAN cable (sold separately) to LAN port

Connect the LAN terminal on this receiver to the LAN terminal on your router (with or without the built-in DHCP server function) with a straight LAN cable (CAT 5 or higher).

Turn on the DHCP server function of your router. In case your router does not have the built-in DHCP server function, it is necessary to set up the network manually. For details, see

Network Setup menu on page 91

.

LAN terminal specifications

! LAN terminal : Ethernet jack (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)

Notes

! Refer to the operation manual of the equipment you have as the connected equipment and connection method may differ depending on your Internet environment.

! When using a broadband Internet connection, a contract with an Internet service provider is required. For more details, contact your nearest Internet service provider.

Important

! Do not move the receiver with the Bluetooth ADAPTER connected. Doing so could cause damage or faulty contact.

% Switch the receiver into standby and connect Bluetooth ADAPTER to the ADAPTER PORT.

! For instructions on playing the Bluetooth wireless technology device, see

Pairing the Bluetooth ADAPTER and

Bluetooth wireless technology device on page 50 .

33

03

Connecting your equipment

Connecting an iPod

This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from your iPod using the controls of this receiver.

iPod/iPhone

iPod iPhone

DIRECT CONTROL

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT STATUS BAND TUNER EDIT

Connecting a USB device

It is possible to play audio and photo files by connecting USB devices to this receiver.

iPod iPhone

DIRECT CONTROL

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT STATUS BAND TUNER EDIT

HDMI 5 INPUT

5V 1 A

HDMI 5 INPUT

5V 1 A

 

USB cable included with the iPod

USB mass storage device

Tip

! An iPod/iPhone can be connected to the receiver. For details on supported models and versions of the respective products, see

Playing an iPod

on

page 46 .

% Switch the receiver into standby, and then use the iPod cable to connect your iPod to the

iPod/iPhone terminal on the front panel of this receiver.

! For the cable connection, also refer to the operating instructions for your iPod.

! When connecting an iPhone to this unit, keep the iPhone at least 20 cm (0.66 ft) away from this unit. If the iPhone is kept closer to this unit and a telephone call is received by the iPhone, noise may be output from this device.

! iPod recharging occurs whenever an iPod is connected to this unit. (Recharging is enabled only when the unit’s power is turned on.)

! For instructions on playing the iPod, see

Playing an iPod

on

page 46 .

% Switch the receiver into standby then connect your USB device to the USB terminal on the

front panel of this receiver.

! This receiver does not support a USB hub.

! For instructions on playing the USB device, see Playing a USB device on page 47

.

34

03

Connecting an MHL-compatible device

An MHL-compatible mobile device can be connected to enjoy 3D/Full-HD videos, high quality multi-channel audio, and photos etc., with charge the battery on the receiver. Use the MHL cable to connect the device.

HDMI

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

ASSIGN-

ABLE

1 - 6

SELECTABLE

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

IN 1

(DVD)

BD IN IN 2

(SAT/CBL)

IN 3

(DVR/BDR)

IN 4 IN 6 MHL

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.9 A MAX)

HDMI

OUT 2

(HDZONE)

ASSIGN-

ABLE

1 6

- SELECTABLE

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

BD IN IN 4 IN 6 MHL

MHL cable

MHL enabled device

% Switch the receiver into standby then use the MHL cable to connect your MHL enabled

device to the MHL terminal on the rear panel of this receiver.

! To automatically switch to the MHL input when an MHL-compatible device is connected, see MHL Setup on page 92

.

! The MHL-compatible device is recharged whenever it is connected to this unit. (Recharging is enabled only when the unit’s power is turned on.)

! For instructions on playing the MHL-compatible device, see Playing an MHL-compatible device

on

page 48 .

! Do not place the MHL device on this unit which has the power turned on.

Connecting an HDMI-equipped component to the front panel input

iPod iPhone

DIRECT CONTROL

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT STATUS BAND TUNER EDIT

Connecting your equipment

Connecting to a wireless LAN

Wireless connection to the network is possible through a wireless LAN connection. Use the separately sold

AS-WL300 for connection.

! Use only the furnished accessory connecting cable.

! Certain settings are required to use a wireless LAN converter (AS-WL300). For instructions on making these settings, see the operating instructions included with the wireless LAN converter (AS-WL300).

LAN (10/100)

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.6 A MAX)

LAN

(10/100)

DC OUTPUT for WIRELESS LAN

Modem Internet

Router

WAN

 

DC 5V Ethernet WPS

Wireless LAN converter (AS-WL300)

5V 1 A

HDMI 5 INPUT

Video camera (etc.)

35

03

Connecting your equipment

Connecting an IR receiver

If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or shelving unit, or you wish to use the sub zone remote control in another zone, you can use an optional IR receiver (such as a Niles or Xantech unit) to control your system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of this receiver.

! Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window.

! Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component to check for IR compatibility.

! If using two remote controls (at the same time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel.

1 Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR IN jack on the rear of this receiver.

Closet or shelving unit

Non-Pioneer component

IR

IN

IR

OUT IN

Plugging in the receiver

Only plug in after you have connected all your components to this receiver, including the speakers.

CAUTION

! Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet, as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The power cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the power cord once in a while. If you find it damaged, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company for a replacement.

! Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this unit.

! Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than that described below.

! The receiver should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular use, e.g., when on vacation.

1 Plug the supplied power cord into the AC IN socket on the back of the receiver.

2 Plug the other end into a power outlet.

 

IR

OUT IN

IR receiver

2 Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the IR OUT jack on the rear of this receiver to link it to the IR receiver.

Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for the type of cable necessary for the connection.

36

Basic Setup

How to use the built-in AVNavigator ..........................................................................................38

Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) ....................................39

The Input Setup menu ...................................................................................................................41

Operation Mode Setup .................................................................................................................42

Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language)............................................................... 42

Changing the TV format setting ...................................................................................................42

Changing the frequency step .......................................................................................................43

About the Home Menu .................................................................................................................43

 

37

04

Basic Setup

How to use the built-in AVNavigator

The built-in AVNavigator is equipped with Wiring Navi, which allows you to perform connection of this receiver and initial settings in interactive mode. By simply following the screen prompts to connect and set the unit, highly accurate initial settings can be performed easily.

Additionally, in order to use various functions easily, contents linked to the receiver can be used.

Operating Environment

! AVNavigator can be used in the following environments.

— Windows PC: Microsoft

® Windows ® XP/Windows Vista ® /Windows ® 7/Windows ® 8/Windows ® 8.1

— Mac: Mac OS X (10.7, 10.8 or 10.9)

— iPad/iPhone/iPod touch: iOS 7

— Android device: Android 4.0.4, 4.1.1, 4.1.2, 4.2, 4.2.2, 4.4.2

! Some AVNavigator functions use an Internet browser. The following browsers are supported:

— Windows PC: Internet Explorer

® 8, 9, 10, 11

— Mac/iPad/iPhone/iPod touch: Safari 6.0

— Android device: Android browser

! Depending on the computer network setting or security setting, AVNavigator may not operate.

Using AVNavigator

! With a Windows PC other than Windows XP, you can use the following method to launch AVNavigator.

Launch Explorer and right-click <SC-1224> displayed in the ‘Network’ folder, then click

View device webpage’.

! On a Mac, launch Safari and click <SC-1224> displayed in ‘Bonjour’ on the Bookmarks bar.

Important

! Connect the LAN terminal to the network (

page 33

).

1 Press STANDBY/ON to switch on the receiver and your computer.

2 Launch AVNavigator.

Operate AVNavigator by following the screen prompts of your computer, etc.

! If using a Windows PC, complete the below steps to start up.

1

Start up Internet Explorer on your PC (open any random Internet page).

2

Press STATUS on the remote control and check the front panel display on the receiver (the IP address of the receiver will appear).

(Example Text Display)

— If ‘Bonjour’ is not displayed, tick the ‘Include Bonjour in the Favorites bar’ check box on the

Advanced’ tab in the Safari ‘Preferences...’ menu.

If 0.0.0.0 or 169.254.112.202 appears in the address, it indicates that the receiver is not connected to the network. Check to make sure that the receiver and router are properly connected.

3

Enter number in 2 above in the field in Internet Explorer shown below and then press the ENTER key.

 

(Example Input Format) 192.168.0.124

38

04

Basic Setup

! When using an iPad/iPhone/iPod touch, from the App Store, download iControlAV5, which is a free application. After launching iControlAV5, follow the instructions on the screen. After that, on the Home screen, tap

AVNavigator’ or the icon.

iPad iPhone/iPod touch

— On an iPad, you can operate AVNavigator for iPad. Download AVNavigator for iPad from the App Store.

After launching AVNavigator for iPad, follow the instructions on the screen.

! When using an Android device, from Google Play Store, download iControlAV5, which is a free application.

After launching iControlAV5, follow the instructions on the screen. After that, on the Home screen, tap the icon.

3 Select and use the desired function.

AVNavigator includes the following functions:

! Wiring Navi – Guides you through connections and initial settings in dialog fashion. High precision initial settings can be made easily.

! Interactive Operation Guide – The receiver will be operated using the remote control on the screen and you can view function explanations or videos. Explanations of the functions that are operated using the remote control are also automatically displayed.

! Network Setup – Used to make network-related settings.

 

Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto

MCACC)

The Full Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening area, taking into account ambient noise, speaker connection and speaker size, and tests for both channel delay and channel level. After you have set up the microphone provided with your system, the receiver uses the information from a series of test tones to optimize the speaker settings and equalization for your particular room.

Important

! Make sure the microphone and speakers are not moved during the Full Auto MCACC Setup.

! Using the Full Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.

! Before using the Full Auto MCACC Setup, the headphones should be disconnected.

! With factory default settings, the on-screen display will be output from all HDMI output terminals and displayed on any TV connected via HDMI cable. You can change where the screen is output in the

MAIN/HDZONE (

page 94

) and HDMI output ( page 71 ) settings.

CAUTION

! The test tones used in the Full Auto MCACC Setup are output at high volume.

1 Press STANDBY/ON to switch on the receiver and your TV.

Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.

2 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

MULTI-ZONE

CONTROL

SPEAKERS iPod iPhone

DIRECT CONTROL

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

HDZONE

ON/OFF

PHASE

CONTROL

PHONES MCACC

SETUP MIC 5V 1 A

STATUS BAND

HDMI 5 INPUT

TUNER EDIT

Microphone

39

Tripod

Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.

04

Basic Setup

If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If you do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the microphone.

Install the microphone on a stable floor. Placing the microphone on any of the following surfaces may make accurate measurement impossible:

! Sofas or other soft surfaces.

! High places such as tabletops and sofa tops.

The Full Auto MCACC display appears once the microphone is connected.

1a.Full Auto MCACC

A/V RECEIVER

Speaker System

EQ Type

: Normal(SB/FH)

: – – –

MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1

Measurement Type : Basic

START

Exit Return

! If you leave the GUI screen for over five minutes, the screen saver will appear.

3 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

4 Select the parameters you want to set.

If the speakers are connected using any setup other than Normal(SB/FH), be sure to set Speaker System before the Full Auto MCACC Setup. See

Speaker system setting on page 89

.

! Speaker System – Shows the current settings. When this is selected and ENTER is pressed, the speaker system selection screen appears. Select the proper speaker system, then press RETURN to return.

If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another

room, read through Speaker system setting on page 89

and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 4.

! EQ Type – This determines how the frequency balance is adjusted. Normally select SYMMETRY. For details, see

Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 82

.

! MCACC – The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening posi-

tions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can rename it later in Data Management on page 87 ).

! Measurement Type – When Basic is set, the minimum required measurement is performed in a short period of time. When Expert is set, accurate and precise measurement is performed so it will take some time.

5 Select ‘START’, then press ENTER.

6 Follow the instructions on-screen.

Make sure the microphone is connected, and if you’re using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched on and set to a comfortable volume level.

7 Wait for the test tones to finish, then confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI screen.

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while it’s doing this.

If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed, the Full Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press

ENTER in step 7.

! With error messages (such as Too much ambient noise! or Check microphone.), select RETRY after check-

ing for ambient noise (see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 40

) and verifying the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and continue.

1a.Full Auto MCACC

A/V RECEIVER

Now Analyzing... 2/6

Environment Check

Ambient Noise

Microphone

: OK

:

Speaker YES/NO :

Exit Cancel

L

FHL

C

FHR

R

SR

SBR

SBL

10

SL

SW

OK

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

1a.Full Auto MCACC

A/V RECEIVER

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

RETRY

Exit Cancel

The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the actual speakers you have.

! If you see an ERR message (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a problem with the speaker connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use i/j to select the speaker and k/l to change the setting and continue.

! If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected.

connections.

— If the connections were wrong, turn off the power, disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly.

After this, perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure again.

— If the connections were right, select GO NEXT and continue.

8 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs more test tones to determine the optimum receiver settings.

Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening. It may take 3 to 10 minutes.

9 The Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and the Home Menu menu reappears automatically.

Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Full Auto MCACC Setup.

The settings made in the Full Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system,

but it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using The Advanced MCACC menu on page 81

or

The

System Setup and Other Setup menus on page 88 .

! Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm (5 inches) will end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the

Manual speaker setup

on

page 89 .

! The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.

! If Full Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we recommend adjusting the settings manually.

Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup

If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC Setup (too much background noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary. If there are any instructions showing in the front panel display, please follow them.

! Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the microphone. If this seems to be happening, switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup.

 

40

04

Basic Setup

The Input Setup menu

You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according to the default settings (see

Input function default and possible settings on page 41 ). In this case, you need to

tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up to which terminal so the buttons on the remote control correspond to the components you’ve connected.

! With factory default settings, the on-screen display will be output from all HDMI output terminals and displayed on any TV connected via HDMI cable. You can change where the screen is output in the

MAIN/HDZONE ( page 94 ) and HDMI output (

page 71 ) settings.

1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU.

3 Select ‘Input Setup’ from the System Setup menu.

4.System Setup

A/V RECEIVER a . Manual SP Setup b . Input Setup c . OSD Language d . Network Setup e . HDMI Setup f . MHL Setup g . Other Setup

Exit Return

Input

Input Name

Input Skip

Audio In

HDMI Input

Component In

4b.Input Setup

A/V RECEIVER

:

:

:

:

:

:

DVD

Rename

OFF

COAX-1

Input-1

In-1

Exit Return

4 Select the input function that you want to set up.

The default names correspond with the names next to the terminals on the rear panel (such as DVD or SAT/CBL which, in turn, correspond with the names on the remote control.

5 Select the input(s) to which you’ve connected your component.

For example, if your DVD player only has an optical output, you will need to change the DVD input function’s

Audio In setting from COAX-1 (default) to the optical input you’ve connected it to.

6 When you’re finished, proceed to the settings for other inputs.

There are optional settings in addition to the assignment of the input jacks:

! Input Name – You can choose to rename the input function for easier identification. Select Rename to do so, or Default to return to the system default.

! Input Skip – When set to ON, that input is skipped when selecting the input using ALL. (DVD and other inputs can be still be selected directly with the input function buttons.)

7 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the System Setup menu.

Input function default and possible settings

The terminals on the receiver generally correspond to the name of one of the input functions. If you have connected components to this receiver differently from (or in addition to) the defaults below, see

The Input Setup menu on page 41

to tell the receiver how you’ve connected up. The dots (k) indicate possible assignments.

Input function

Input Terminals

Audio Component

BD

DVD

SAT/CBL

DVR/BDR

HDMI 1

HDMI

(BD)

IN 1

IN 2

IN 3

k

COAX-1

COAX-2

OPT-2

IN 1

IN 2

HDMI 2

k

HDMI 3

HDMI 4

HDMI 5

(front panel)

HDMI 6/MHL

INTERNET RADIO

MEDIA SERVER

FAVORITES iPod/USB

k

IN 4

IN 5

IN 6

TV

CD

OPT-1

<a>

ANALOG-1

<b>

TUNER

ADAPTER PORT

a When ARC at HDMI Setup is set to ON, it is not possible to make assignments to the TV input’s Audio In terminals.

b Only the TV and CD inputs can be assigned to ANALOG-1.

 

41

04

Basic Setup

Operation Mode Setup

This receiver is equipped with a great number of functions and settings. The Operation Mode feature is provided for users who find it difficult to master all these functions and settings.

One of two settings can be selected for the Operation Mode: Expert and Basic.

! With factory default settings, the on-screen display will be output from all HDMI output terminals and displayed on any TV connected via HDMI cable. You can change where the screen is output in the

MAIN/HDZONE ( page 94 ) and HDMI output (

page 71 ) settings.

Important

! Many of the settings and functions cannot be selected when the Operation Mode is changed to Basic.

1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘Operation Mode Setup’ from the HOME MENU.

3 Select the Operation Mode setting you want.

! Expert (default) – Users can set all the functions by themselves.

! Basic – Only certain basic settings can be operated. The settings that can be operated are shown below. They can be set as necessary by referring to the operating instructions.

Descriptions Page Operable settings/items

HOME MENU

Full Auto MCACC

Input Name

Input Skip

Software Update

Network Information

Audio Parameters

MCACC

(MCACC preset)

DELAY

(Sound Delay)

S.RTRV

(Auto Sound Retriever)

DUAL

(Dual Mono)

INPUT ATT

(Input attenuate)

V.SPs

(Virtual Speakers)

V.SB

(Virtual Surround Back)

V.HEIGHT

(Virtual Height)

V.WIDE

(Virtual Wide)

Makes high precision sound field settings easily.

Input names can be changed as desired for easier use.

Inputs not being used are skipped (not displayed).

Updates to the latest version of the software.

Checks the receiver’s IP address.

Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory.

Adjusts the delay time of the overall sound.

Plays compressed sound with high sound quality.

Dual monaural audio setting.

Decreases the input signal level to reduce distortion.

Automatically complements virtual surround speakers (surround back, front height and front wide) to create a sound field.

Creates a virtual surround back channel sound for playback.

Creates a virtual height channel sound for playback.

Creates a virtual wide channel sound for playback.

39

41

41

93

92

67

67

67

67

67

67

67

67

67

Operable settings/items

V.DEPTH

(Virtual Depth)

Other functions

ALL (INPUT SELECTOR)

VOLUME +/, MUTE

LISTENING MODE

PQLS

PHASE (Phase Control)

SOUND RETRIEVER AIR iPod iPhone DIRECT CONTROL

Descriptions

Plays with a sound field suited for 3D images.

Switches the input.

Use to set the listening volume.

Selects your favorite listening modes.

Plays using the PQLS function.

Plays with phase shifting in the low range corrected.

Switches the input to ADAPTER PORT and plays compressed sound with high sound quality.

Switches the input to iPod/USB and sets the mode allowing operation from the iPod.

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the HOME MENU.

Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language)

The language used on the Graphical User Interface screen can be changed.

! The explanations in these operating instructions are for when English is selected for the GUI screen.

! With factory default settings, the on-screen display will be output from all HDMI output terminals and displayed on any TV connected via HDMI cable. You can change where the screen is output in the

MAIN/HDZONE (

page 94

) and HDMI output ( page 71 ) settings.

Page

67

45

45

52

64

55

51

46

1 Press STANDBY/ON to switch on the receiver and your TV.

Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver (for example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO jacks on your TV, make sure that the VIDEO input is now selected).

2 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

3 Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu.

4 Select ‘OSD Language’ from the System Setup menu.

5 Select the desired language.

6 Select ‘OK’ to change the language.

The setting is completed and the System Setup menu reappears automatically.

42

Changing the TV format setting

If the Graphical User Interface screen is not displayed correctly, it may be that the TV system is set incorrectly for your country or region.

1 Switch the receiver into standby.

2 While holding down ENTER on the front panel, press u STANDBY/ON.

The display shows RESET c NO d.

3 Use TUNE

i/j to select PAL/NTSC c PAL d, and then use PRESET k/l to select PAL or

NTSC.

 

04

Changing the frequency step

If you find that you can’t tune into stations successfully, the frequency step may not be suitable for your country/ region. Here’s how to switch the setting:

1 Switch the receiver into standby.

2 While holding down ENTER on the front panel, press u STANDBY/ON.

The display shows RESET c NO d.

3 Use TUNE

i/j to select FREQ STEP c 9k d, and then use PRESET k/l to select 9k or 10k.

About the Home Menu

This receiver’s Home Menu (HOME MENU) can be used to make various settings and to check and adjust items that have been set.

! With factory default settings, the Home Menu screen will be output from all HDMI output terminals and displayed on any TV connected via HDMI cable. You can change where the screen is output in the

MAIN/HDZONE ( page 94 ) and HDMI output (

page 71 ) settings.

1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

2 To display the Home Menu screen, press HOME MENU on the remote control.

HOME MENU

A/V RECEIVER

1. Advanced MCACC

2. MCACC Data Check

3. Data Management

4. System Setup

5. Network Information

6. Operation Mode Setup

Exit Return

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

The top level in the Home Menu is as shown below. Refer to the respective explanations to set, check and adjust as necessary.

! Advanced MCACC – Use this to make automatic settings and detailed manual settings for the surround sound. For details, see

Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu on page 82

.

! MCACC Data Check – This displays the Advanced MCACC measurement results. Use it to check the MCACC

memory. For details, see Checking MCACC Data

on

page 86 .

! Data Management – Use this to manage the data in the MCACC memory. For details, see

Data Management on page 87 .

! System Setup – Use this to make various settings related to this system. For details, see

Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 89

.

! Network Information – The setting status of the network-related items can be checked. For detail, see

Checking the Network Information on page 92 .

! Operation Mode Setup – Use this to select this receiver’s operation mode. For details, see

Operation Mode

Setup on page 42

.

43

Basic Setup

 

Basic playback

Playing a source .............................................................................................................................45

Playing an iPod ..............................................................................................................................46

Playing a USB device .....................................................................................................................47

Playing an MHL-compatible device ..............................................................................................48

Listening to the radio ....................................................................................................................49

Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment of Music ..............................................................50

 

44

05

Basic playback

Playing a source

Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.

STANDBY/ON

BD

USB iPod

SOURCE CONTROL

DVD SAT

HDMI

ADPT

BT

ROKU

MHL NET

TUNER TV CD ALL

VOLUME

LISTENING MODE

AUTO SURR ADV

1 Switch on your system components and receiver.

Start by switching on the playback component (for example a DVD player), your TV and subwoofer (if you have one), then the receiver (press u STANDBY/ON).

Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.

2 Select the input function you want to play.

You can use the input function buttons on the remote control or the front panel INPUT SELECTOR dial.

! As necessary, select the type of audio input signal ( page 55 ).

3 Press AUTO (AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to select ‘AUTO SURROUND’ and start playback of the source.

For such sound sources as Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD, the surround sound is played. With stereo sound, the sound is played from the left and right front speakers with the default listening mode.

To play a stereo sound source in multichannel, press SURR or ADV to select your favorite listening mode.

(Example: Press ADV several times to select EXT.STEREO.)

! You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be set to output Dolby Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an

MPEG audio option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.

! See also

Listening to your system on page 52 for information on different ways of listening to sources.

It is possible to check on the front panel display whether or not multi-channel playback is being performed prop-

erly. For details, see Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats on page 110

.

When multi-channel speakers (more than the two front left and right channels) are connected, straight decoding is performed, so the input signal’s format name (for example, TrueHD, DTS-HD MSTR or DTS-HD HI RES) is displayed.

If the display does not correspond to the input signal and listening mode, check the connections and settings.

4 Use the VOLUME +/– to adjust the volume level.

Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.

Note

Depending on the input to be played, the playback operation can in some cases be performed using the onscreen display.

With factory default settings, the on-screen display will be output from all HDMI output terminals and displayed on any TV connected via HDMI cable. You can change where the screen is output in the MAIN/HDZONE (

page

94 ) and HDMI output (

page 71

) settings.

 

Turning off the sound

Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).

% Press MUTE.

Playing a source with HDMI connection

% Use ALL to select the input function connected to the receiver’s HDMI input terminals.

You can also perform the same operation by using the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel or by pressing

HDMI on the remote control repeatedly.

! Set the HDMI parameter in

Setting the Audio options on page 67

to THROUGH if you want to hear HDMI audio output from your TV (no sound will be heard from this receiver).

! If the video signal does not appear on your TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, use an analog video connection.

45

05

Basic playback

Playing an iPod

This receiver has the iPod/iPhone terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from your iPod using the controls of this receiver.

Here we describe the procedure for playback on an iPod. For playback on a USB device, see

Playing a USB device on page 47 .

Playing back audio files stored on an iPod

To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take advantage of the GUI screen of your TV connected to this receiver.

You can also control all operations for music in the front panel display of this receiver.

! Note that characters that cannot be displayed on this receiver are displayed as #.

! This feature is not available for photos on your iPod.

Finding what you want to play

When your iPod is connected to this receiver, you can browse songs stored on your iPod by playlist, artist name, album name, song name, genre or composer, similar to using your iPod directly.

 

Important

! USB works with iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone, iPod touch (1st through 5th generation) and iPod nano (3rd through 7th generation).

However, some of the functions may be restricted for some models.

! This receiver has been developed and tested for the software version of iPod/iPhone indicated on the website of Pioneer.

http://pioneer.jp/homeav/support/ios/ao/

! Installing software versions other than indicated on the website of Pioneer to your iPod/iPhone may result in incompatibility with this receiver.

! iPod and iPhone are licensed for reproduction of non-copyrighted materials or materials the user is legally permitted to reproduce.

! Features such as the equalizer cannot be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the equalizer off before connecting.

! Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from the iPod failure.

! When listening to a track on the iPod in the main zone, it is possible to control the sub zone, but not to listen to a different track in the sub zone from the one playing in the main zone.

1 Press STANDBY/ON to switch on the receiver and your TV.

See Connecting an iPod

on

page 34 .

About one minute is required between turning the power on and completion of startup.

! It is also possible to operate the iPod on the iPod itself, without using the TV screen. For details, see

Switching the iPod controls on page 46

.

2 Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.

When the display shows the names of folders and files, you’re ready to play music from the iPod.

! When o or p is pressed at the list screen, the page switches.

! To return to the previous level any time, press RETURN.

i/j to browse the selected category (e.g., albums).

! Use k/l to move to previous/next levels.

3 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play, then press d to start

playback.

! On the playback screen, pressing RETURN displays a list screen. To return to the playback screen, press

DISP.

Note

You can play all of the songs in a particular category by selecting the All item at the top of each category list. For example, you can play all the songs by a particular artist.

Basic playback controls

This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on an iPod.

DISP

TOP

MENU

ENTER

HOME

MENU RETURN

46

Switching the iPod controls

You can switch over the iPod controls between the iPod and the receiver.

1 Press HOME MENU to switch the iPod controls.

This enables operation and display on your iPod, and this receiver’s remote control and GUI screen become inactive.

2 Press HOME MENU again to switch back to the receiver controls.

Note

Change the receiver’s input to the iPod in one action by pressing the iPod iPhone DIRECT CONTROL button on the front panel to enable iPod operations on the iPod.

05

Basic playback

Playing a USB device

It is possible to play files using the USB interface on the front of this receiver.

! Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory drives (particularly key drives) and digital audio players (MP3 players) of format FAT16/32.

! Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for any loss of data that may occur when connected to this receiver.

1 Press STANDBY/ON to switch on the receiver and your TV.

See Connecting a USB device

on

page 34 .

About one minute is required between turning the power on and completion of startup.

! Make sure the receiver is in standby when disconnecting the USB device.

2 Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.

When the display shows the names of folders and files, you’re ready to play from the USB device.

Note

If an Over Current message lights in the display, the power requirements of the USB device are too high for this receiver. Try following the points below:

! Switch the receiver off, then on again.

! Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched off.

! Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the device) for USB power.

If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely your USB device is incompatible.

Playing back audio files stored on a USB memory device

The maximum number of levels that you can select in Step 2 (below) is 9.

! Note that non-Roman characters in the playlist are displayed as #.

i/j to select a folder, then press ENTER to browse that folder.

! To return to the previous level any time, press RETURN.

2 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play, then press d to start

playback.

! Copyrighted audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.

! DRM-protected audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.

! On the playback screen, pressing RETURN displays a list screen. To return to the playback screen, press

DISP.

Basic playback controls

This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on USB memory devices.

! Press iPod USB to switch the remote control to the iPod/USB operation mode.

DISP

TOP

MENU

ENTER

HOME

MENU RETURN

Note

While a DSD file is being played, m and n are disabled.

Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory device

! Photo files cannot be played in the sub zone.

i/j to select a folder, then press ENTER to browse that folder.

! For high resolution files, some time may be required for the photo to appear.

! To return to the previous level any time, press RETURN.

2 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play, then press ENTER to start playback.

The selected content is displayed in full screen and a slideshow starts.

Basic playback controls

Button(s)

ENTER, d g

What it does

Starts displaying a photo and playing a slideshow.

Stops the player and returns to the previous menu.

Tip

Slide shows of photo files can be played while listening to music files by returning to the folder/file list display while playing a music file on a USB device and then playing the photo files. At that time, select music files with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less.

 

47

05

Basic playback

About playable file formats

The USB function of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats.

! With MP3, WAV, AAC, FLAC, AIFF and Apple Lossless files, when music files with the same format, sampling frequency, quantization bit number and number of channels are played successively, they are played with no gap.

— When AAC or MP3 format is used, sound is reproduced with the minimum gap. If you are conscious about gaps, use WAV or FLAC files.

Music files

Category Extension

MP3

<a>

WAV

WMA

AAC

Apple Lossless

FLAC

<e>

.mp3

.wav

.wma

.m4a

.aac

.3gp

.3g2

.m4a

.mp4

.flac

MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3

LPCM

WMA2/7/8/9

<d>

MPEG-4 AAC LC

MPEG-4 HE AAC

Apple Lossless

FLAC

Stream

Sampling frequency

Quantization bitrate

Channel

Bitrate

VBR/CBR

Sampling frequency

<b>

Quantization bitrate

Channel

Sampling frequency

Quantization bitrate

Channel

Bitrate

VBR/CBR

Sampling frequency

Quantization bitrate

Channel

Bitrate

VBR/CBR

Sampling frequency

Quantization bitrate

Channel

Sampling frequency

<b>

Quantization bitrate

Channel

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

16 bit

2 ch

8 kbps to 320 kbps

Supported/Supported

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,

88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz,

192 kHz

16 bit, 24 bit

2 ch, 5.0 ch, 5.1 ch

<c>

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

16 bit

2 ch

5 kbps to 320 kbps

Supported/Supported

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

16 bit

2 ch

16 kbps to 320 kbps

Supported/Supported

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,

88.2 kHz, 96 kHz

16 bit, 24 bit

2 ch

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,

88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz,

192 kHz

16 bit, 24 bit

2 ch, 5.0 ch, 5.1 ch

<c>

Category Extension Stream

AIFF

DSD

<f>

.aiff

.aif

.dff

.dsf

AIFF

DSDIFF

DSF

Sampling frequency

Quantization bitrate

Channel

Sampling frequency

Quantization bitrate

Channel

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,

88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz,

192 kHz

16 bit, 24 bit

2 ch

2.8224 MHz

1 bit

2 ch a “MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.” b 32 kHz, 176.4 kHz and 192 kHz support 2-channel audio sources only.

c Gapless playback is not possible with a 5.0-channel or 5.1-channel audio source.

d Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice.

e Uncompressed FLAC files are not supported. Pioneer does not guarantee playback.

f DSD files cannot be played in the sub zone.

Photo files

Category Extension

JPEG .jpg

Format

Meeting the following conditions:

! Baseline JPEG format

! Y:Cb:Cr – 4:2:2

Playing an MHL-compatible device

MHL (Mobile High-definition Link) is an interface standard for transmitting digital signals with mobile devices.

MHL can carry high quality multi-channel audio data and 3D/Full-HD video formats.

The MHL-compatible device’s video signals are output from the TV connected to the receiver, the audio signals are output from the speakers connected to the receiver or TV.

1 Press STANDBY/ON to switch on the receiver and your TV.

See Connecting an MHL-compatible device on page 35 .

2 Press MHL on the remote control to switch the receiver to the MHL.

3 Select and play the desired contents on the MHL-compatible device.

Notes

! MHL-compatible devices can be operated with the receiver’s remote control by pressing the remote control’s

MHL button, but depending on the MHL-compatible device being used, some buttons may not be operable.

! To playback from a MHL-compatible device connected to the receiver on a TV that is also connected to the receiver, the power to the receiver must be turned on.

 

48

05

Basic playback

Listening to the radio

The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the frequency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a station below. Once you are tuned to a station you can memorize the frequency for recall later-see

Saving station presets

on

page 49

for more on how to do this.

1 Press TUNER to select the tuner.

2 Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM), if necessary.

3 Tune to a station.

There are three ways to do this:

! Automatic tuning – To search for stations in the currently selected band, press and hold TUNE +/ for about a second. The receiver will start searching for the next station, stopping when it has found one. Repeat to search for other stations.

! Manual tuning – To change the frequency one step at a time, press TUNE +/.

! High speed tuning – Press and hold TUNE +/ for high speed tuning. Release the button at the frequency you want.

Improving FM sound

If the TUNED or STEREO indicator doesn’t light when tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak, press

MPX to switch the receiver into mono reception mode. This should improve the sound quality and allow you to enjoy the broadcast.

Using the noise cut mode

The two noise cut modes can be used when receiving AM broadcasts. Press MPX to select the noise cut mode (1 to 2).

Tuning directly to a station

1 Press TUNER to select the tuner.

2 Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM), if necessary.

3 Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access).

4 Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of the radio station.

For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0, 6, 0, 0.

If you make a mistake halfway through, press D.ACCESS twice to cancel the frequency and start over.

Saving station presets

If you often listen to a particular radio station, it’s convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station. This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. This receiver can memorize up to 63 stations, stored in seven banks, or classes (A to G) of 9 stations each.

1 Tune to a station you want to memorize.

See Listening to the radio

on

page 49

for more on this.

2 Press TOOLS (TUNER EDIT).

The display shows PRESET MEMORY, then a blinking memory class.

3 Press CLASS to select one of the seven classes, then press PRESET +/– to select the station preset you want.

You can also use the number buttons to select a station preset.

4 Press ENTER.

After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop blinking and the receiver stores the station.

Listening to station presets

1 Press TUNER to select the tuner.

2 Press CLASS to select the class in which the station is stored.

Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G.

3 Press PRESET +/– to select the station preset you want.

! You can also use the number buttons on the remote control to recall the station preset.

Naming station presets

For easier identification, you can name your station presets.

1 Choose the station preset you want to name.

See Listening to station presets

on

page 49 for how to do this.

2 Press TOOLS (TUNER EDIT).

The display shows PRESET NAME, then a blinking cursor at the first character position.

3 Input the name you want.

Use i/j (or TUNE i/j of front panel) to select a character, k/l (or PRESET k/l of front panel) to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.

Notes

! To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1 to 3 and input eight spaces instead of a name.

! Once you have named a station preset, you can press DISP when listening to a station to switch the display between name and frequency.

 

49

05

Basic playback

Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment of Music

Bluetooth

wireless technology enabled device: cell phone

Bluetooth

wireless technology enabled device:

Digital music player

Device not equipped with

Bluetooth

wireless technology:

Digital music player

+

Bluetooth

audio transmitter

(sold commercially)

Remote control operation

Music data

This receiver

Bluetooth®

ADAPTER

! About one minute is required between turning the power on and completion of startup.

Wireless music play

When the Bluetooth ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or AS-BT200) is connected to this unit, a product equipped with

Bluetooth wireless technology (portable cell phone, digital music player, etc.) can be used to listen to music wirelessly. Also, by using a commercially available transmitter supporting Bluetooth wireless technology, you can listen to music on a device not equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology. The AS-BT100 and AS-BT200 models supports SCMS-T contents protection, so music can also be enjoyed on devices equipped with SCMS-T type

Bluetooth wireless technology.

Remote control operation

The remote control supplied with this unit allows you to play and stop media, and perform other operations.

! It must be necessary that the Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device supports AVRCP profiles.

! Remote control operations cannot be guaranteed for all Bluetooth wireless technology enabled devices.

Pairing the Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless technology device

“Pairing” must be done before you start playback of Bluetooth wireless technology content using the Bluetooth

ADAPTER. Make sure to perform pairing the first time you operate the system or any time pairing data is cleared.

The pairing step is necessary to register the Bluetooth wireless technology device to enable Bluetooth communications. For more details, see also the operating instructions of your Bluetooth wireless technology device.

! Pairing is required when you first use the Bluetooth wireless technology device and Bluetooth ADAPTER.

! To enable Bluetooth communication, pairing should be done with both your system and Bluetooth wireless technology device.

! If the Bluetooth wireless technology device’s security code is “0000”, there is no need to make the security code setting on the receiver. Press BT ADPT to set the ADAPTER PORT input, then conduct the pairing operation on the Bluetooth wireless technology device. If pairing is successful, there is no need to performing the pairing operation below.

! When using the AS-BT200 only: This unit complies with Bluetooth Specifications Ver. 2.1. When this unit and another device equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology both comply with Bluetooth Specification Ver. 2.1, pairing of the two may be possible without the need for inputting a password.

In this case, a passcode may be displayed on this receiver and on the device equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology. If this happens, check that the same passcode is displayed on this receiver and the device equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology, then press ENTER. After this, also perform the connection operation on the Bluetooth device to be connected. If the passcode does not match the code displayed on the

Bluetooth device to be connected, press RETURN to cancel pairing, then try starting over.

Press BT ADPT to set the ADAPTER PORT input, then conduct the pairing operation on the Bluetooth wireless technology device. If pairing is successful, there is no need to performing the pairing operation below.

! Pair one unit at a time.

! When connecting this receiver by Bluetooth connections with a device equipped with the Bluetooth function to listen to music, do not connect any devices other than this receiver by Bluetooth connection to the Bluetoothequipped device. If a Bluetooth connection is already established with a device other than this receiver, disconnect the other device before connecting this receiver.

 

1 Press BT ADPT on the remote control to switch the receiver to ADAPTER PORT input.

2 Press TOP MENU to select Bluetooth Setup.

You can use any of 0000, 1234 or 8888 PIN codes. Bluetooth wireless technology device using any other PIN code cannot be used with this receiver.

5 Press the RETURN button twice to exit Bluetooth Setup.

6 Switch on the Bluetooth wireless technology device that you want to make pair, place it near the receiver and set it to the pairing mode.

7 From the Bluetooth wireless technology device list, select Bluetooth ADAPTER and enter the PIN code selected in step 4.

8 Check to see that the Bluetooth ADAPTER is detected by the Bluetooth wireless technology device.

If the receiver and Bluetooth wireless technology device are not paired, start over from step 6.

Notes

! The PIN code may in some cases be referred to as PASSKEY.

! For information on enabling pairing on the Bluetooth wireless technology device, connection procedures, etc., see the Bluetooth wireless technology device’s operating instructions.

50

05

Listening to music contents of a Bluetooth wireless technology device with your system

1 Press BT ADPT on the remote control to switch the receiver to ADAPTER PORT input.

2 From the Bluetooth wireless technology device, perform the operation to connect to the

Bluetooth ADAPTER.

! When the Bluetooth ADAPTER is not plugged into the ADAPTER PORT, No Adapter will be displayed if

ADAPTER PORT input is selected.

3 Start playback of music contents stored on the Bluetooth wireless technology device.

This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on Bluetooth wireless technology devices.

! Bluetooth wireless technology device should be compatible with AVRCP profile.

! Depending on the Bluetooth wireless technology device you use, operation may differ from what is shown in the remote control buttons.

4 While listening to a source, set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press ADV repeatedly to select SOUND RETRIEVER AIR.

Notes

! The Bluetooth

®

word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by PIONEER CORPORATION is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

! With this receiver, when an iPod is connected or disconnected while the music of a Bluetooth wireless technology device is playing, the connection with the Bluetooth wireless technology device may be canceled.

! The SOUND RETRIEVER AIR listening mode can only be selected when the ADAPTER PORT input.

51

Basic playback

 

Listening to your system

Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes ................................................53

Selecting MCACC presets ..............................................................................................................55

Choosing the input signal .............................................................................................................55

Better sound using Phase Control ................................................................................................55

 

52

06

Listening to your system

Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes

Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in surround sound. However, the options available will depend on your speaker setup and the type of source you’re listening to.

To play with surround sound, check “

Standard surround sound ” or “

Using the Advanced surround effects ” below

and select the desired mode.

To play with the optimum mode for the input signal, see “

Auto playback ” or “

Using Stream Direct ”. (The sound is

played in stereo when 2-channel signals are input, in surround when multi-channel signals are input.)

Important

! The listening modes and many features described in this section may not be available depending on the current source, settings and status of the receiver.

Auto playback

There are many ways to listen back to sources using this receiver, but the simplest, most direct listening option is the Auto Surround feature. The receiver automatically detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.

% While listening to a source, press AUTO (AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) for auto

playback of a source.

AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display before showing the decoding or playback format. Check the digital format indicators in the front panel display to see how the source is being processed.

! If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround encoded, the proper decoding format will automatically be selected and shows in the display.

! When listening to the ADAPTER PORT input, the SOUND RETRIEVER AIR feature is selected automatically.

ALC – In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this receiver equalizes playback sound levels.

Also, the low and high frequency sounds, dialogs, surround effects, etc., that are difficult to hear when the volume is low are adjusted to be optimal for the volume level. This mode is particularly optimum when listening at night.

Note

When ALC is selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 67 .

Standard surround sound

The following modes provide basic surround sound for stereo and multichannel sources.

% While listening to a source, press SURR (STANDARD SURROUND).

If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode.

! If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround encoded, the proper decoding format will automatically be selected and shows in the display.

! When only one surround back speaker is connected (set), even though a 5.1-channel signal is input,

Pro Logic IIx cannot be selected and Pro Logic II is used.

! Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT cannot be selected when no front height speaker is connected. Furthermore,

WIDE SURROUND MOVIE and WIDE SURROUND MUSIC cannot be selected when no front wide speaker is connected.

With two channel sources, you can select from:

! Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel sound (surround back), especially suited to movie sources

! Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel sound (surround back), especially suited to music sources

! Pro Logic IIx GAME – Up to 7.1 channel sound (surround back), especially suited to video games

! PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround sound (sound from the surround speakers is mono)

! Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT – Up to 7.1 channel sound (front height)

! WIDE SURROUND MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel sound (front wide), especially suited to movie sources

! WIDE SURROUND MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel sound (front wide), especially suited to music sources

! Neo:X CINEMA – Up to 7.1 channel sound (surround back, front height or front wide), especially suited to movie sources

! Neo:X MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel sound (surround back, front height or front wide), especially suited to music sources

! Neo:X GAME – Up to 7.1 channel sound (surround back, front height or front wide), especially suited to video games

! STEREO – The audio is heard with your sound settings and you can still use the audio options.

With multichannel sources, if you have connected surround back, front height or front wide speakers, you can select

(according to format):

! Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above

! Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above

! Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back channel sound for 5.1 channel sources and provides pure decoding for 6.1 channel sources (like Dolby Digital Surround EX)

! DTS-ES Matrix or DTS-ES Discrete – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback with DTS-ES encoded sources

! Neo:X CINEMA – See above

! Neo:X MUSIC – See above

! Neo:X GAME – See above

! Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT – See above

! WIDE SURROUND MOVIE – See above

! WIDE SURROUND MUSIC – See above

! STEREO – See above

! Straight Decode – Plays back without the effects above.

 

Notes

! When listening sources in Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode, you can also adjust the H.GAIN effect (see

Setting the Audio options

on

page 67

).

! When listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you

can adjust: C.WIDTH,DIMENSION and PANORAMA. See Setting the Audio options on page 67 to adjust

them.

! When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:X Cinema, Neo:X Music or Neo:X Game mode, you can also adjust

the C.GAIN effect (see Setting the Audio options on page 67 ).

! When listening through headphones, you can select STEREO mode only.

53

06

Listening to your system

Using the Advanced surround effects

The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety of additional surround sound effects. Most Advanced

Surround modes are designed to be used with film soundtracks, but some modes are also suited for music sources. Try different settings with various soundtracks to see which you like.

% Press ADV (ADVANCED SURROUND) repeatedly to select a listening mode.

! ACTION – Designed for action movies with dynamic soundtracks

! DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of dialog

! ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video games

! SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs

! CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type sound

! ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for rock and/or pop music

! EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to a stereo source, using all of your speakers

! F.S.SURROUND – Use to provide a rich surround sound effect directed to the center of where the front left and right speakers sound projection area converges.

Front left

speaker

Front right

speaker

Using Stream Direct

Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary signal processing is bypassed, and you’re left with the pure analog or digital sound source.

Processing differs depending on the input signal and whether or not surround back speakers are connected. For details, see

Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats on page 110 .

% While listening to a source, press AUTO (AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to select the

mode you want.

Check the digital format indicators in the front panel display to see how the source is being processed.

! AUTO SURROUND – See

Auto playback on page 53

.

! ALC – Listening in Auto level control mode ( page 53 ).

— When ALC is selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in

Setting the Audio options on page 67

.

! DIRECT – Plays back sound from the source with the least modification next to PURE DIRECT. With DIRECT, the only modifications added to PURE DIRECT playback are calibration of the sound field by the MCACC system and the Phase Control effect.

! PURE DIRECT – Plays back unmodified sound from source with only minimal digital treatment.

 

Note

When listening through headphones, you can select ALC or PURE DIRECT mode only.

! SOUND RETRIEVER AIR – Suitable for listening to the sound from a Bluetooth wireless technology device. The

SOUND RETRIEVER AIR listening mode can only be selected when the ADAPTER PORT input.

! PHONES SURR – When listening through headphones, you can still get the effect of overall surround.

! ECO MODE 1 – Select this to play for example music that has a high audio level with a lower power consumption than usual.

! ECO MODE 2 – Select this to play movies, etc., with a high ratio of low volume scenes and high volume scenes

(a large dynamic ratio) with a lower power consumption than usual. This mode provides greater power savings than ECO MODE 1.

Notes

! The Front Stage Surround Advance (F.S.SURROUND) function allows you to create natural surround sound effects using just the front speakers and the subwoofer.

! When ECO MODE 1 or ECO MODE 2 is selected, the front panel’s display lights with the dimmest brightness.

! Since ECO MODE 1 and ECO MODE 2 reduce the power consumption, the speakers are switched in function of the number of input channels. Because of this, a speaker switching sound (clicking sound) may be produced when the number of input channels is switched. If this bothers you, switch to a different listening mode.

! When using headphones, SOUND RETRIEVER AIR (only with the ADAPTER PORT input), PHONES SURR,

ECO MODE 1 and ECO MODE 2 can be selected.

54

06

Listening to your system

Selecting MCACC presets

! Default setting: MEMORY 1

If you have calibrated your system for different listening positions, you can switch between settings to suit the kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).

1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and then press AUDIO P..

Better sound using Phase Control

This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses phase correction measures to make sure your sound source arrives at the listening position in phase, preventing unwanted distortion and/or coloring of the sound.

Phase Control technology provides coherent sound reproduction through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound image. The default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase Control switched on for all sound sources.

1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and then press AUDIO P..

 

k/l to select the setting.

Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets. See

Data Management on page 87

to check and manage your current settings.

! These settings have no effect when headphones are connected.

! You can also press k/l to select the MCACC preset.

Choosing the input signal

On this receiver, it is possible to switch the input signals for the different inputs as described below.

! This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz) and DTS (including DTS 96/24) digital signal formats. The compatible signals via the HDMI terminals are: Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-EXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio and SACD.

! You may get digital noise when an LD, CD, DVD or BD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal.

To prevent noise, make the proper digital connections ( page 23 ) and set the signal input to DIGITAL.

! Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player.

1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and then press AUDIO P..

The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front panel lights.

Each press cycles through the options as follows:

! AUTO – The receiver selects the first available signal in the following order: HDMI; DIGITAL; ANALOG.

! ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.

! DIGITAL – Select an optical or coaxial digital input signal. ‘DIGITL’ is displayed on the front panel display.

! HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.

— When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH, the sound will be heard through your TV, not from this receiver.

When set to DIGITAL, HDMI or AUTO (only selected DIGITAL or HDMI), the indicators light according to the signal being decoded (see

Display on page 14 ).

Notes

! Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they crest and trough together, resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough, then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an unreliable sound image will be produced.

! For discs created with standards other than Phase Control, the LFE channel is delayed upon recording in the first place. Phase Control Plus function corrects for phase shifting on such discs. For instructions on setting the Phase Control Plus, see

Setting the Audio options on page 67

.

! If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0º). However, the effect you can actually feel when PHASE CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also recommended you try changing the orientation or the place of your subwoofer.

! Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to off. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the cutoff frequency to a higher value.

! If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect.

! The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:

— When headphones are plugged in.

— When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.

— When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Setting the Audio options

on

page

67 .

55

Playback with NETWORK features

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................57

Playback with Network functions ................................................................................................58

About network playback ..............................................................................................................60

About playable file formats ..........................................................................................................61

 

56

07

Playback with NETWORK features

Introduction

This receiver is equipped with the LAN terminal and you can enjoy the following features by connecting your components to these terminals.

Listening to Internet radio stations

You can select and listen to your favorite Internet radio station from the list of Internet radio stations created, edited, and managed by the vTuner database service exclusively for use with the Pioneer products.

dSee

Playback with Network functions

on

page 58

and

Listening to Internet radio stations on page 58 .

Playback the music files stored in PCs

You can playback a lot of musics stored in your PCs using this unit.

! Besides a PC, you can also play back audio files stored on your other components with the built-in media server function based on DLNA 1.0 or DLNA 1.5 framework and protocols (i.e. network-capable hard disks and audio systems).

dSee

Playback with Network functions

on

page 58

and

Playing back audio files stored on components on the network

on

page 60 .

Listening to Spotify audio streaming playback

dSee

About the Spotify audio stream playback function on page 59 .

Using AirPlay on iPod touch, iPhone, iPad, and iTunes

AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain Lion or later, and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.

To use AirPlay, select your receiver on your iPod touch, iPhone, iPad or in iTunes.

*1

The receiver’s input will switch automatically to AirPlay when AirPlay is in use. *2

The following operations can be performed when in AirPlay mode:

! Adjustment of the receiver’s volume from iPod touch, iPhone, iPad or iTunes.

! Pause/resume, next/previous track, and shuffle/repeat from the remote control of the receiver. *3

! Display of the currently playing track information on the receiver’s display, including artist, song and album name.

*1: For more information, see the Apple website (http://www.apple.com).

*2: The receiver’s power automatically turns on when Network Standby at Network Setup is set to ON.

*3: If operation is not possible, press NET, then operate again.

Notes

! To listen to Internet radio stations, you must sign a contract with an ISP (Internet Service Provider) beforehand.

! Photo or video files cannot be played back.

! With Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12, DRM-protected audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.

About playable DLNA network devices

This unit allows you to play music on media servers connected on an identical Local Area Network (LAN) as the receiver. This unit allows for the playing of files stored on the following devices:

! PCs running Microsoft Windows 7 or Windows 8 with Windows Media Player 12 installed

! DLNA-compatible digital media servers (on PCs or other components)

Files stored in a PC or DMS (Digital Media Server) as described above can be played via command from an external Digital Media Controller (DMC). Devices controlled by this DMC to play files are called DMRs (Digital Media

Renderers). This receiver supports this DMR function. When in the DMR mode, such operations as playing and stopping files can be performed from the external controller. Volume adjustment and the muting control are also possible. The DMR mode is canceled if the remote control unit is operated while in the DMR mode (aside from certain buttons, including the VOLUME +/, MUTE and DISP).

! Depending on the external controller being used, playback may be interrupted when the volume is adjusted from the controller. In this case, adjust the volume from the receiver or remote control.

Notes

! A network environment is required to use AirPlay.

! The receiver’s name that shows up in the AirPlay UI on iPod touch, iPhone, iPad and iTunes can be changed by

Friendly Name from Network Setup.

! AirPlay provided on this receiver has been developed and tested based on the software versions for the iPod, iPhone, iPad and the software versions for iTunes that are indicated on the Pioneer website. AirPlay may not be compatible with iPod, iPhone, iPad or iTunes software versions other than those indicated on the Pioneer website.

http://pioneer.jp/homeav/support/ios/ao/

About the DHCP server function

To play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations, you must turn on the DHCP server function of your router. In case your router does not have the built-in DHCP server function, it is necessary to set up the network manually. Otherwise, you cannot play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations. See

Network Setup menu on page 91

for more on this.

Authorizing this receiver

This receiver must be authorized to enable playback. This happens automatically when the receiver makes a connection over the network to the PC. If not, please authorize this receiver manually on the PC. The authorization

(or permission) method for access varies depending on the type of server currently being connected. For more information on authorizing this receiver, refer to the instruction manual of your server.

 

57

07

Playback with NETWORK features

About HTC Connect

This receiver features “HTC Connect”, a simple way to enjoy music content from your HTC Connect certified smart phone.

1 HTC Connect music streaming provided on this product has been developed based on interoperability testing as defined by the HTC Connect Certification program with the HTC Connect-compatible smartphones.

2 Music Navigation via the music progress bar is not currently supported with HTC Connect.

3 Third party music applications (those other than HTC’s pre-installed “Music” app) have not been tested for compatibility and may not work. HTC Connect has been tested with MP3, AAC, WMA and WAV encoding formats. Other formats may not be compatible.

4 High network congestion may interfere with the operation of HTC Connect.

HTC Connect Certified Smartphones

The HTC Connect-compatible smartphones, Please check Pioneer website for up to date information about compatible devices and audio format support.

http://www.pioneer.com.sg (for Southeast Asia) http://www.pioneer.com.au (for Australia) http://www.pioneerhongkong.com.hk (for Hong Kong)

Notes

! Specifications and design subject to modification without notice.

! HTC, HTC Connect and the HTC Connect logo are trademarks of HTC Corporation.

Playback with Network functions

Important

! About one minute is required between turning the power on and completion of startup.

! When you play back audio files, ‘Connecting...’ is displayed before playback starts. The display may continue for several seconds depending on the type of file.

! In case a domain is configured in a Windows network environment, you cannot access a PC on the network while you are logged onto the domain. Instead of logging onto the domain, log onto the local machine.

! There are cases where the time elapsed may not be correctly displayed.

1 Press NET repeatedly to select the category you want to play back.

It may take several seconds for this receiver to access the network.

Select a category from the following list:

! INTERNET RADIO – Internet radio

— When INTERNET RADIO is selected, the radio station that was playing last time is played.

! MEDIA SERVER – Server components on the network

! FAVORITES – Favorite songs currently being registered

Depending on the selected category, the names of folders, files, and Internet radio stations are displayed.

i/j to select the folder, music files or Internet radio station to play back, and then

press ENTER.

Press i/j to scroll up and down the list and select the desired item. When you press ENTER, playback starts with the playback screen being displayed for the selected item. To return to the list screen, press RETURN.

When the list screen is displayed from the playback screen, the playback screen reappears automatically if no operation is performed for three minutes while the list screen is displayed.

Only audio files with the mark can be played. In case of the folders with the mark, use i/j and ENTER to select the desired folder and audio files.

! When o or p is pressed at the list screen, the page switches.

! To return to the playback screen from the list display, press DISP.

3 Repeat step 2 to play back the desired song.

For detailed operating instructions, refer to the section shown below.

! Internet radio stations – See

Listening to Internet radio stations on page 58

.

! Media server – See

Playing back audio files stored on components on the network on page 60

.

! Favorites – See

Playing back your favorite songs

on

page 60

.

 

Basic playback controls

You can perform the following operations with the remote control of this receiver. Note that some buttons are not available for operation depending on the category currently being played back.

! Press NET to switch the remote control to the network operation mode.

Fav

DISP

TOP

MENU

TOOLS

MENU

ENTER

RETURN

CLR

Notes

! While a DSD file is being played, m and n are disabled.

! When input is MEDIA SERVER or FAVORITES, the following action is taken, depending on the server or file.

— e may not work.

— m and n may not work or may take the same action as o and p.

! When input is MEDIA SERVER, by pressing TOOLS on the list display screen, you can switch the displayed titles in alphabetical order or track order.

Listening to Internet radio stations

Internet radio is an audio broadcasting service transmitted via the Internet. There are a large number of Internet radio stations broadcasting a variety of services from every corner of the world. Some are hosted, managed, and broadcast by private individuals while others are by the corresponding traditional terrestrial radio stations or radio networks. Whereas terrestrial, or OTA (over-the-air), radio stations are geographically restricted on the range of radio waves broadcast from a transmitter through the air, Internet radio stations are accessible from anywhere in the world, as long as there is a connection to the Internet, as services are not transmitted through the air but are delivered over the World Wide Web. On this receiver you can select Internet radio stations by genre as well as by region.

Depending on the Internet line conditions, the sound may not be smooth when playing Internet radio.

About list of Internet radio

The list of Internet radio stations on this receiver is created, edited, and managed by the vTuner database service exclusively for use with this receiver. For details about vTuner, see

vTuner on page 114 .

58

07

Playback with NETWORK features

Saving and retrieving Internet radio stations

You can easily save and retrieve saved Internet radio stations. See

Playing back your favorite songs on page 60

for more on this.

! To listen to Internet radio stations, you must have high-speed broadband Internet access. With a 56 K or ISDN modem, you may not enjoy the full benefits of Internet radio.

! The port number varies depending on the Internet radio station. Check the firewall settings.

! A list of Internet radio stations provided by the vTuner database service is subject to change or deletion without notice due to various reasons.

! Broadcasts may be stopped or interrupted depending on the Internet radio station. In this case, you cannot listen to a radio station selected from the list of Internet radio stations.

Registering broadcast stations not on the vTuner list from the special Pioneer site

With the receiver, broadcast stations not included on the list of station distributed by vTuner can be registered and played. Check the access code required for registration on the receiver, use this access code to access the special Pioneer Internet radio site and register the desired broadcast stations in your favorites. The address of the special Pioneer Internet radio site is: http://www.radio-pioneer.com

1 Display the Internet Radio list screen.

To display the Internet Radio list screen, perform step 1 at

Playback with Network functions

on

page 58 .

i/j to select ‘Get access code’, then press ENTER.

The access code required for registration on the special Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed. Make a memo of this address.

The following can be checked on the Help screen:

! Get access code – The access code required for registration on the special Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed.

! Show Your WebID/PW – After registering on the special Pioneer Internet radio site, the registered ID and password are displayed.

! Reset Your WebID/PW – Resets all the information registered on the special Pioneer Internet radio site.

When reset, all the registered broadcast stations are also cleared. If you want to listen to the same stations, re-register after resetting.

4 Access the special Pioneer Internet radio site from your computer and perform the registration process.

http://www.radio-pioneer.com

Access the above site and use the access code in step 3 to perform user registration, following the instructions on the screen.

5 Register the desired broadcast stations as your favorites, following the instructions on the computer’s screen.

Both broadcast stations not on the vTuner list and stations on the vTuner list can be registered. In this case they are registered on the receiver as favorite broadcast stations and can be played.

About the Spotify audio stream playback function

Spotify is a music streaming distribution service managed and operated by Spotify Ltd. and distributing music over the Internet.

Spotify audio streams can be enjoyed using this unit and your smartphone or other mobile digital device.

Preparations (1) Installing the Spotify application on mobile digital devices and registering a Spotify Premium account

Important

! The Spotify application must be installed on mobile digital devices and you must have registered a Spotify

Premium account (for a charge) in order to use the Spotify audio stream playback function on this unit. For registration procedures and other Spotify services, see the Spotify website.

http://www.spotify.com/

http://www.spotify.com/connect/

! For information on the countries and regions where Spotify services can be used, see the website below.

http://www.spotify.com/

Spotify functions may be changed without notice.

An Internet connection is required on the mobile digital device in order to use the Spotify application. Using the mobile telephone line for the Internet connection tends to lead to high packet communication charges, so we recommend subscribing to a fixed packet rate plan. For details, contact your mobile telephone operator.

Preparations (2) Connecting this unit to the network

! Connect this unit to the network and also to the Internet (

page 33

! Connect the mobile digital device by Wi-Fi to the wireless LAN router of the same network as the one to which this unit is connected. For instructions on connecting, see the operating instructions of the mobile digital device and the wireless LAN router.

In order to use the Spotify audio stream playback function from the Spotify application

To use the Spotify audio stream playback function, select this unit on the Spotify application.

When Spotify audio streaming starts, this unit’s input automatically switches to Spotify.

CAUTION

Even if you are away from home, if you start Spotify audio streaming to play music on your mobile digital device and this unit is selected, the sound will be output from this unit. Depending on the volume level, the output may be loud, so be sure to check the audio output selection carefully before starting audio streaming. In addition, if you accidentally select this unit and play the sound on it, switch the audio output selection to the mobile digital device.

Notes

! A separate contract with/payment to an Internet service provider is required to use the Spotify audio stream playback function.

! This unit’s name is displayed as the playback device on the Spotify application. Also, this unit’s name can be changed at Friendly Name in the network settings.

! When this unit is selected with the Spotify application, the account information is registered on this unit as well. When disposing of this unit, reset this unit’s settings in order to delete the account information registered on this unit. For instructions on resetting, see this unit’s operating instructions.

 

59

07

Playback with NETWORK features

Playing back audio files stored on components on the network

This unit allows you to play music on media servers connected on an identical Local Area Network (LAN) as the receiver. This unit allows for the playing of files stored on the following devices:

! PCs running Microsoft Windows Vista or XP with Windows Media Player 11 installed

! PCs running Microsoft Windows 7 or Windows 8 with Windows Media Player 12 installed

! DLNA-compatible digital media servers (on PCs or other components)

Playing back your favorite songs

Up to 64 favorite tracks on the media server and/or Internet radio stations can be registered in the Favorites folder. Note that only the audio files stored on components on the network can be registered.

Registering and deleting audio files and Internet radio stations in and from the

Favorites folder

1 Press NET repeatedly to select the INTERNET RADIO or MEDIA SERVER.

2 With the track or Internet radio station you want to register selected, press +Favorite.

The selected song or Internet radio station is then registered in the Favorite.

Note

To delete tracks or Internet radio stations that have been registered, set the input to FAVORITES, select the track or station to be deleted, then press the CLR button.

About network playback

The network playback function of this unit uses the following technologies:

Windows Media Player

See Windows Media Player 11/Windows Media Player 12 on page 114 for more on this.

DLNA

Content playable over a network

! Even when encoded in a compatible format, some files may not play correctly.

! Movie or Photo files cannot be played back.

! There are cases where you cannot listen to an Internet radio station even if the station can be selected from a list of radio stations.

! Some functions may not be supported depending on the server type or version used.

! Supported file formats vary by server. As such, files not supported by your server are not displayed on this unit.

For more information check with the manufacturer of your server.

 

Disclaimer for Third Party Content

Access to content provided by third parties requires a high speed internet connection and may also require account registration and a paid subscription.

Third party content services may be changed, suspended, interrupted, or discontinued at any time without notice, and Pioneer disclaims any liability in connection with such occurrences.

Pioneer does not represent or warrant that content services will continue to be provided or available for a particular period of time, and any such warranty, express or implied, is disclaimed.

About playback behavior over a network

! Playback may stall when the PC is switched off or any media files stored on it are deleted while playing content.

! If there are problems within the network environment (heavy network traffic, etc.) content may not be displayed or played properly (playback may be interrupted or stalled). For best performance, a 100BASE-TX connection between player and PC is recommended.

! If several clients are playing simultaneously, as the case may be, playback is interrupted or stalled.

! Depending on the security software installed on a connected PC and the setting of such software, network connection may be blocked.

Pioneer is not responsible for any malfunction of the player and/or the NETWORK features due to communication error/malfunctions associated with your network connection and/or your PC, or other connected equipment.

Please contact your PC manufacturer or Internet service provider.

This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing, Inc.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows Media and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

DLNA CERTIFIED

TM

Audio Player

The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a cross-industry organization of consumer electronics, computing industry and mobile device companies. Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing of digital media through a wired or wireless network in the home.

The DLNA certification logo makes it easy to find products that comply with the DLNA Interoperability Guidelines.

This unit complies with DLNA Interoperability Guidelines v1.5.

When a PC running DLNA server software or other DLNA compatible device is connected to this player, some setting changes of software or other devices may be required. Please refer to the operating instructions for the software or device for more information.

DLNA

TM

, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED

Living Network Alliance.

TM

are trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the Digital

60

07

Playback with NETWORK features

About playable file formats

The NETWORK feature of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats. Also, the compatibility of file formats varies depending on the type of server. Check with your server to ensure the compatibility of file formats supported by your server.

! Internet radio playback may be affected by the Internet communications environment, and in this case playback may not be possible even with the file formats listed here.

! With MP3, WAV, AAC, FLAC, AIFF and Apple Lossless files, when music files with the same format, sampling frequency, quantization bit number and number of channels are played successively, they are played with no gap.

— Gapless playback is not possible when the format is being converted (transcoded) by the server.

— Gapless playback is not possible in the DMR mode.

— When AAC or MP3 format is used, sound is reproduced with the minimum gap. If you are conscious about gaps, use WAV or FLAC files.

Music files

Category Extension

MP3

<a>

WAV

WMA

AAC

Apple Lossless

.mp3

.wav

.wma

.m4a

.aac

.3gp

.3g2

.m4a

.mp4

Stream

MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3

LPCM

WMA2/7/8/9

<d>

MPEG-4 AAC LC

MPEG-4 HE AAC

Apple Lossless

Sampling frequency

Quantization bitrate

Channel

Bitrate

VBR/CBR

Sampling frequency

<b>

Quantization bitrate

Channel

Sampling frequency

Quantization bitrate

Channel

Bitrate

VBR/CBR

Sampling frequency

Quantization bitrate

Channel

Bitrate

VBR/CBR

Sampling frequency

Quantization bitrate

Channel

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

16 bit

2 ch

8 kbps to 320 kbps

Supported/Supported

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,

88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz,

192 kHz

16 bit, 24 bit

2 ch, 5.0 ch, 5.1 ch

<c>

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

16 bit

2 ch

5 kbps to 320 kbps

Supported/Supported

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

16 bit

2 ch

16 kbps to 320 kbps

Supported/Supported

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,

88.2 kHz, 96 kHz

16 bit, 24 bit

2 ch

Category Extension Stream

FLAC

<e>

AIFF

DSD

<f>

.flac

.aiff

.aif

.dff

.dsf

FLAC

.aiff

.aif

DSDIFF

DSF

Sampling frequency

<b>

Quantization bitrate

Channel

Sampling frequency

Quantization bitrate

Channel

Sampling frequency

Quantization bitrate

Channel

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,

88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz,

192 kHz

16 bit, 24 bit

2 ch, 5.0 ch, 5.1 ch

<c>

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,

88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz,

192 kHz

16 bit, 24 bit

2 ch

2.8224 MHz

1 bit

2 ch a

“MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.”

b 32 kHz, 176.4 kHz and 192 kHz support 2-channel audio sources only.

c ! When playing the 5.0 channel or 5.1 channel file in the sub zone, only the front left and right sound is played. Multichannel playback is only available with the main zone.

! Gapless playback is not possible with a 5.0-channel or 5.1-channel audio source.

d Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice.

e Uncompressed FLAC files are not supported. Pioneer does not guarantee playback.

f DSD files cannot be played in the sub zone.

 

61

Control with HDMI function

About the Control with HDMI function .......................................................................................63

Making Control with HDMI connections ..................................................................................... 63

HDMI Setup ....................................................................................................................................63

Before using synchronization .......................................................................................................64

About synchronized operations ...................................................................................................64

Setting the PQLS function .............................................................................................................64

About Sound Retriever Link and Stream Smoother Link ...........................................................64

Cautions on the Control with HDMI function ............................................................................. 65

 

62

08

Control with HDMI function

About the Control with HDMI function

Synchronized operations below with a Control with HDMI-compatible Pioneer TV or Blu-ray Disc player are possible when the component is connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable.

! The receiver’s volume can be set and the sound can be muted using the TV’s remote control.

! The receiver’s input switches over automatically when the TV’s input is changed or a Control with HDMIcompatible component is played.

! The receiver’s power is also set to standby, when the TV’s power is set to standby.

Important

! With Pioneer devices, the Control with HDMI functions are referred to as “KURO LINK”.

! You cannot use this function with components that do not support Control with HDMI.

! We only guarantee this receiver will work with Pioneer Control with HDMI-compatible components. However, we do not guarantee that all synchronized operations will work with components that support the Control with

HDMI function.

! Use a High Speed HDMI ® / TM cable when you want to use the Control with HDMI function. The Control with

HDMI function may not work properly if a different type of HDMI cable is used.

! For details about concrete operations, settings, etc., refer to also the operating instructions for each component.

Making Control with HDMI connections

You can use synchronized operation for a connected TV and other components.

! Be sure to connect the TV’s audio cable to the audio input of this unit. When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC (Audio Return Channel) function, the sound of the

TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT 1 terminal, so there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this

case, set ARC at HDMI Setup to ON (see HDMI Setup on page 63

).

For details, see Connecting your TV and playback components on page 25 .

Important

! When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch the power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket. After completing all connections, connect the power cords to the wall socket.

! After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization process begins.

You cannot carry out any operations during this process. The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this process, and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking. When you set the Control with HDMI to OFF, you can skip this process. For details about the Control with HDMI feature, see

Control with

HDMI function on page 62

.

! To get the most out of this function, we recommend that you connect your HDMI component not to a TV but rather directly to the HDMI terminal on this receiver.

! The Control with HDMI function can be used with a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal, but not with a

TV connected to the HDMI OUT 2 terminal.

HDMI Setup

You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as the connected Control with HDMI-compatible components in order to make use of the Control with HDMI function. For more information see the operating instructions for each component.

1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and then press HOME MENU.

2 Select ‘System Setup’, then press ENTER.

3 Select ‘HDMI Setup’, then press ENTER.

4 Select the ‘Control’ setting you want.

Choose whether to set this unit’s Control with HDMI function ON or OFF. You will need to set it to ON to use the

Control with HDMI function.

When using a component that does not support the Control with HDMI function, set this to OFF.

! ON – Enables the Control with HDMI function. Set Control Mode, ARC and PQLS in the subsequent setting items to the desired values.

Also, by setting this to ON, the Sound Retriever Link and Stream Smoother Link functions can be operated

automatically by connecting a player supporting the respective functions. See Setting the Audio options

on

page 67 for details on Sound Retriever Link,

Setting the Video options

on

page 69

for details on Stream

Smoother Link.

! OFF – The Control with HDMI is disabled. The Control Mode, ARC and PQLS functions in the subsequent setting items cannot be used.

5 Select the ‘Control Mode’ setting you want.

Choose whether you want to enable synchronized operations.

! ON – Enabled for the synchronized operations.

! OFF – The synchronized operations disabled.

6 Select the ‘ARC’ setting you want.

When a TV supporting the HDMI ARC (Audio Return Channel) function is connected to the receiver, the sound of the TV can be input via the HDMI OUT 1 terminal.

After setting the ARC, some time may be required for the connected device to be recognized and the sound to be produced.

! ON – The TV’s sound is input via the HDMI terminal.

! OFF – The TV’s sound is input from the Audio input terminals other than HDMI inputs.

7 Select the ‘PQLS’ setting you want.

Choose whether to set this unit’s PQLS function AUTO or OFF.

For details about PQLS function, see

Setting the PQLS function on page 64

.

! AUTO – PQLS is enabled. A precision quartz controller in this receiver eliminates distortion caused by timing errors (jitter), giving you the best possible digital-to-analog conversion when you use the HDMI interface. This is valid as an HDMI function for PQLS-compatible players.

! OFF – PQLS is disabled.

8 Select the ‘Standby Through’ setting you want.

It is possible to transfer signals from an HDMI-connected player to the TV when this receiver’s power is on standby.

Select the HDMI input whose HDMI signal is to be input for through transfer when in the standby mode. When

LAST is selected, the signal being input to the currently selected HDMI input is transferred. When OFF is selected, no HDMI input is transferred through when in the standby mode. (However, when Control is set to ON, the HDMI signal is transferred through by the Control with HDMI function even when in the standby mode.)

! When anything other than OFF is set for this setting, the receiver’s HDMI input can be switched even when the receiver is in the standby mode. (Switch by pointing the remote control at the receiver and pressing the

HDMI, BD, DVD or SAT/CBL button.)

! Setting to anything other than OFF increases power consumption in the standby mode.

! This setting can be used even with devices that are not compatible with the Control with HDMI function.

! The Standby Through function cannot be used with MHL-compatible devices.

9 When you’re finished, press HOME MENU.

 

63

08

Control with HDMI function

Before using synchronization

Once you have finished all connections and settings, you must:

1 Put all components into standby mode.

2 Turn the power on for all components, with the power for the TV being turned on last.

3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is connected to this receiver, and see if video output from connected components displays properly on the screen or not.

4 Check whether the components connected to all HDMI inputs are properly displayed.

Setting the PQLS function

PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a digital audio signal transfer control technology using the Control with

HDMI function. It offers higher-quality audio playback by controlling audio signals from the receiver to a PQLS compatible player, etc. This enables removing jitter that has a negative effect on the quality of the sound and is generated upon transmission.

! On players compatible with PQLS Bit-stream, PQLS always works for all sources.

! On players compatible with PQLS Multi Surround, PQLS works for all sources. Set the player’s audio output to

Linear PCM.

! On players compatible with PQLS 2 ch Audio, PQLS only works when playing CDs.

Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with your player for more information.

This function is activated when Control is set to ON.

 

About synchronized operations

Important

! Synchronized operations are enabled when Control Mode is set to ON after setting Control in HDMI Setup to

ON. For details, see

HDMI Setup on page 63 .

The Control with HDMI-compatible component connected to the receiver operates in sync as described below.

! From the menu screen of the Control with HDMI-compatible TV, set audio to be played through this receiver, and the receiver will switch to the synchronized amp mode.

! When in the synchronized amp mode, you can adjust the receiver’s volume or mute the sound using the TV’s remote control.

! When in the synchronized amp mode, the synchronized amp mode is canceled when the receiver’s power is turned off. To turn the synchronized amp mode back on, set audio to be played through the receiver from the

TV’s menu screen, etc. This receiver will power up and switch to the synchronized amp mode.

! When the synchronized amp mode is canceled, the receiver’s power turns off if you were viewing an HDMI input or a TV program on the TV.

! When in the synchronized amp mode, the synchronized amp mode is canceled if an operation that produces sound from the TV is performed from the TV’s menu screen, etc.

! When the TV’s power is set to standby, the receiver’s power is also set to standby. (Only when the input for a component connected to the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or when watching the TV.)

! The receiver’s input switches automatically when the Control with HDMI-compatible component is played.

! The receiver’s input switches automatically when the TV’s input is switched.

! The synchronized amp mode remains in effect even if the receiver’s input is switched to a component other than one connected by HDMI.

The operations below can also be used on Pioneer Control with HDMI-compatible TVs.

! When the receiver’s volume is adjusted or the sound is muted, the volume status is displayed on the TV’s screen.

! When the OSD language is switched on the TV, the receiver’s language setting also switches accordingly.

Tip

! The PQLS setting is set at PQLS in HDMI Setup on the HOME MENU, but the setting can also be switched with the remote control, as described below.

1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and then press AUDIO P..

k/l to select the PQLS setting.

The setting is displayed on the front panel display.

! AUTO – PQLS is enabled. A precision quartz controller in this receiver eliminates distortion caused by timing errors (jitter), giving you the best possible digital-to-analog conversion when you use the HDMI interface. This is valid as an HDMI function for PQLS-compatible players.

! OFF – PQLS is disabled.

About Sound Retriever Link and Stream Smoother Link

These are automatic functions allowing you to output optimum audio and video signals from the receiver using the Control with HDMI function. When a player supporting the respective function is connected to the receiver by HDMI, the sound/picture is optimized for the compressed audio/video file played on the player.

! Depending on the compressed audio/video file format, it may not be operated automatically.

! Also see the player’s operating instructions.

Sound Retriever Link

When playing a compressed audio file on the player, the file’s bitrate information is acquired using the Control with HDMI function, and the sound is optimized on the receiver based on this information.

To activate the Sound Retriever Link function, make the setting below.

1 Set the HDMI Setup’s Control to ON, and set the Control Mode setting to ON.

See HDMI Setup on page 63

.

2 Set the S.RTRV (Auto Sound Retriever) setting to ON.

See Setting the Audio options

on

page 67 .

64

08

Stream Smoother Link

Using the Control with HDMI function, the receiver automatically detects whether a compressed video file is being played on the player, and if so automatically activates the Stream Smoother function.

To activate the Stream Smoother Link function, make the setting below.

1 Set the HDMI Setup’s Control to ON, and set the Control Mode setting to ON.

See HDMI Setup on page 63

.

2 Set the STREAM (Stream Smoother) setting to AUTO.

See Setting the Video options

on

page 69 .

Cautions on the Control with HDMI function

! Connect the TV directly to this receiver. Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter

(such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors.

! Only connect components (Blu-ray Disc player, etc.) you intend to use as a source to the HDMI input of this receiver. Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors.

! When the receiver’s Control is turned ON, even if the receiver’s power is in the standby mode, it is possible to output the audio and video signals from a player via HDMI to the TV without producing sound from the receiver, but only when a Control with HDMI-compatible component (Blu-ray Disc player, etc.) and compatible

TV are connected. In this case, the receiver’s power turns on and the power and HDMI indicators light.

! If the Control setting is not set to OFF, the power consumption during standby will increase.

Control with HDMI function

 

65

Using other functions

Setting the Audio options ............................................................................................................67

Setting the Video options .............................................................................................................69

Switching the output (OUTPUT PARAMETER) ............................................................................ 71

Changing the channel level while listening ................................................................................71

Using the MULTI-ZONE controls ...................................................................................................72

Making an audio or a video recording......................................................................................... 73

Network settings from a web browser .......................................................................................73

Using the sleep timer ....................................................................................................................73

Dimming the display .....................................................................................................................73

Checking your system settings .....................................................................................................73

Resetting the system .....................................................................................................................74

 

66

09

Using other functions

Setting the Audio options

There are a number of additional sound settings you can make using the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.

Important

! Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to the current source, settings and status of the receiver.

1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and then press AUDIO P..

Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the table below for notes on this.

See the table below for the options available for each setting.

4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.

Audio parameter menu

Setting What it does

MCACC

(MCACC preset)

Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory when multiple preset memories are saved. When an MCACC preset memory has been renamed, the given name is displayed.

EQ

(Acoustic Calibration EQ)

S-WAVE

(Standing Wave)

PHASE

(Phase Control)

Switches on/off the effects of EQ Pro.

Switches on/off the effects of Standing Wave Control.

PHASE C+

(Phase Control Plus)

DELAY

(Sound Delay)

TONE

(Tone Control)

BASS

<a>

TREBLE

<a>

Switches on/off the effects of Phase Control (

page 55

).

For discs created with standards other than Phase Control, the LFE channel is delayed upon recording in the first place. This function corrects for phase shifting on such discs.

This function is especially effective when playing music.

When AUTO is selected, not only the low range delay but also the polarity and correlation are detected to achieve the optimum effect.

Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video, so the soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the picture. By adding a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound to match the presentation of the video.

Applies the treble and bass tone controls to a source, or bypasses them completely.

This setting is only displayed when the listening mode is STEREO,

Auto surround (STEREO) or SOUND RETRIEVER AIR.

Adjusts the amount of bass.

Adjusts the amount of treble.

Option(s)

ON

OFF

ON

OFF c

M1. MEMORY 1 to

M6. MEMORY 6 d

Default:

M1. MEMORY 1

ON

OFF c

AUTO/0 to 16 (ms) d

Default: AUTO c

0 to 800 (ms) d

Default: 0

BYPASS

ON c

–6 to +6 (dB) d

Default: 0 (dB) c

–6 to +6 (dB) d

Default: 0 (dB)

Setting

S.RTRV

(Auto Sound Retriever)

<b>

DNR

(Digital Noise Reduction)

DIALOG E

(Dialog Enhancement)

<c>

Hi-bit24

PQLS

(Precision Quartz Lock System)

DUAL

(Dual Mono)

SIGSEL

(Signal Select)

Fixed PCM

DRC

(Dynamic Range Control)

<e>

Loud Mgmt

(Loudness Management)

What it does

With the Auto Sound Retriever function, DSP processing is used to compensate for the loss of audio data upon compression, improving the sound’s sense of density and modulation.

Also, when a player supporting the Sound Retriever Link function is connected to the receiver by HDMI, by setting this to ON, the bitrate information of the compressed audio file being played on the player is acquired using the Control with HDMI function, and the sound is optimized based on this information (Sound Retriever Link).

May improve the quality of sound in a noisy source (for example, video tape with lots of background noise) when switched on.

This only has an effect with 2-channel signal inputs.

This mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less.

Localizes dialog in the center channel to make it stand out from other background sounds in a TV or movie soundtrack. By moving from UP1 through UP2 and UP3 up to UP4, you can make the sound source seem to relocate upwards.

Creates a wider dynamic range with digital sources like CDs, DVDs or

BDs. 16- and 20-bit PCM as well as compressed audio is requantized to 24 bits, more subtle musical expression.

This mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less.

Option(s)

OFF

ON

OFF

ON c

OFF/FLAT/UP1/UP2/

UP3/UP4 d

Default: OFF

ON

OFF

AUTO

Switches the PQLS function between AUTO and OFF (

Setting the

PQLS function

on

page 64

).

OFF

Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital soundtracks should be played. Dual mono is not widely used, but is sometimes necessary when two languages need to be sent to separate channels.

Use to switch the input signal type (analog/digital/HDMI) (

page 55

).

This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before OFF recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.

When ON is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-

PCM sources. Please select another input signal if this is a problem.

ON

Adjusts the level of dynamic range for movie soundtracks optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD and

DTS-HD Master Audio (you may need to use this feature when listening to surround sound at low volumes).

AUTO

MAX

MID

OFF

ON

This is a setting of the post process function of the Dolby TrueHD decoder. By setting to OFF, you can enjoy higher sound quality.

This can only be set when DRC is set to OFF and the input signal is a

Dolby TrueHD signal.

OFF

CH1 – Channel 1 is heard only

CH2 – Channel 2 is heard only

CH1 CH2 – Both channels heard from front speakers

AUTO

ANALOG

DIGITAL

<d>

HDMI

OFF

 

67

09

Using other functions

Setting

LFE

(LFE Attenuate)

What it does

Some audio sources include ultra-low bass tones. Set the LFE attenuator as necessary to prevent the ultra-low bass tones from distorting the sound from the speakers.

When set to the recommended value of 0 dB, the LFE is not restricted.

When set to a value other than 0 dB, the LFE is restricted to the set value. When OFF is selected, the sound is not output from the LFE channel.

Option(s)

c

OFF/ –20dB/ –15dB/

–10dB/ –5dB/ –4dB/

–3dB/ –2dB/ –1dB/

0dB d

Default: 0dB

OFF

If the sound is distorted, this can be used to lower the input signal level and reduce the distortion.

ON

INPUT ATT

(Input attenuate)

<f>

HDMI

(HDMI Audio)

<g>

A.DELAY

(Auto delay)

<h>

Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out of this receiver

(amp) or through to a TV. When THROUGH is selected, no sound is output from this receiver.

This feature automatically corrects the audio-to-video delay between components connected with an HDMI cable. The audio delay time is set depending on the operational status of the display connected with an HDMI cable. The video delay time is automatically adjusted according to the audio delay time.

C.WIDTH

(Center Width)

(Applicable only when using a center speaker)

<i>

Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the center channel between the front right and left speakers, making it sound wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings).

DIMENSION

<i>

PANORAMA

<i>

C.GAIN

(Center Gain)

(Applicable only when using a center speaker)

<j>

EFFECT

H.GAIN

(Height Gain)

V.SPs

(Virtual Speakers)

V.SB

(Virtual Surround Back)

<k>

V.HEIGHT

(Virtual Height)

<l>

AMP

THROUGH

OFF

ON c

0 to 7 d

Default: 3

Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to back, making the sound more distant (minus settings), or more forward

(positive settings).

Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a

‘wraparound’ effect.

Adjusts the center gain to create a wider stereo effect with vocals.

Adjust the effect from 0 (all center channel sent to front right and left speakers) to 1.0 (center channel sent to the center speaker only).

Sets the effect level for the ALC mode.

Adjusts the output from the front height speaker when listening in

Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode. If set to HIGH, the sound from the top will be more emphasized.

c

–3 to +3 d

Default: 0

When AUTO is selected, the sound field is created with the surround back, front height and front wide channels whose Speaker Setting is set to NO automatically complemented.

To set the respective channels individually, select MANUAL.

When you’re not using surround back speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround back channel through your surround speakers. You can choose to listen to sources with no surround back channel information.

When you’re not using front height speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual front height channel through your front speakers.

MANUAL

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON c

0 to 1.0 d

Defaults:

Neo:X CINEMA: 1.0

Neo:X MUSIC: 0.3

Neo:X GAME: 1.0 c

10 to 90 d

Defaults: 50

LOW

MID

HIGH

AUTO

68

Setting

V.WIDE

(Virtual Wide)

<m>

What it does

When you’re not using front wide speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual front wide channel through your front speakers.

This improves the continuity of the sound from the front channel to the surround channels.

Option(s)

OFF

ON

V.DEPTH

(Virtual Depth)

<n>

When this mode is selected, the sound field expands virtually to behind the display, resulting in a sound field with the same depth as the 3D picture to achieve a better sense of presence.

OFF

MIN

MID

MAX a The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON.

b

! The default value changes depending on the type of input (

page 74

).

! When ON is selected, the Sound Retriever effect is optimized based on the bitrate information of the contents input to the

USB memory audio and INTERNET RADIO, MEDIA SERVER, FAVORITES (digital audio input only) to achieve high sound quality.

! With the iPod/USB, INTERNET RADIO, MEDIA SERVER, FAVORITES or ADAPTER PORT input function, by default S.RTRV is set to ON.

! When ON is selected, optimum correction of the audio signals input via the HDMI OUT terminal is conducted with the HDMI

ARC (Audio Return Channel) function, and the sound of digital TV broadcasts is produced with HD quality. This is valid when

the input is set to TV and ARC in HDMI Setup is set to ON. (See HDMI Setup on page 63 .)

c UP1 to UP4 can be selected only when the front height speaker is connected. The presence or absence of effects depends on the listening mode.

d On the front panel display, ‘DIGITL’ is displayed.

e The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select MAX or MID for signals other than Dolby TrueHD.

f ! The attenuator isn’t available when using the Stream Direct (ANALOG DIRECT) modes.

! The attenuator does not function when the listening mode is set to PURE DIRECT with AirPlay.

g ! The HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing synchronized amp mode operations.

! The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play the receiver’s HDMI audio and video input signals from the TV with the receiver’s power in the standby mode. See

About synchronized operations on page 64 .

h This feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio/video synchronizing capability (‘lipsync’) for HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A.DELAY to OFF and adjust the delay time manually. For more details about the lipsync feature of your display, contact the manufacturer directly.

i Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music/Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.

j Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:X CINEMA/MUSIC/GAME mode.

k

! This can be set when MANUAL is selected for V.SPs.

! You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the stereo,

Front Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.

! You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set to NO or if Front

Bi-Amp, ZONE 2 or HDZONE is selected at Speaker System. It can also be used when Speaker B is selected at Speaker

System and SP:dA+B ON is selected with the OUT P. button.

! This mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less.

l

! This can be set when MANUAL is selected for V.SPs.

! You can’t use the Virtual Height mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the stereo, Front

Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.

! You can only use the Virtual Height mode if the surround speakers are on and the FH setting is set to NO. It can also not be used when playing signals containing actual front height channel information.

! This mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less.

m ! This can be set when MANUAL is selected for V.SPs.

! You can’t use the Virtual Wide mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the stereo, Front

Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.

! You can only use the Virtual Wide mode if the surround speakers are on and the FW setting is set to NO. It can also not be used when playing signals containing actual front wide channel information.

! This mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less.

n ! This mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less.

! You can’t use the Virtual Depth mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or Stream Direct modes is selected.

 

09

Using other functions

Setting the Video options

There are a number of additional picture settings you can make using the VIDEO PARAMETER menu. The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.

Important

! When MAIN/HDZONE is set to HDZONE, the VIDEO PARAMETER menu setting only affects the HDMI OUT 1 terminal signal.

Also, when HDZONE is set to ON, VIDEO PARAMETER cannot be set (does not work).

! Note that if an option cannot be selected on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to the current source, setting and status of the receiver.

! All of the setting items can be set for each input function.

— However, with the audio only input function, VIDEO PARAMETER cannot be set.

— Also, when HDZONE is set to ON, VIDEO PARAMETER cannot be set (does not work).

! Setting items other than V.CONV can only be selected when V.CONV is set to ON.

1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and then press VIDEO P..

i/j to select the setting you want to adjust.

Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the table below for notes on this.

k/l to set as necessary.

See the table below for the options available for each setting.

4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.

Video parameter menu

Setting

V.CONV

(Digital Video Converter)

<a>

RES

(Resolution)

<b>

PCINEMA

(PureCinema)

<c, e>

P.MOTION

(Progressive Motion)

<c, e>

What it does

Converts video signals for output from the HDMI OUT 1 terminal for

all video types (see page 24 ).

Specifies the output resolution of the video signal (when video input signals are output at the HDMI OUT terminals, select this according to the resolution of your monitor and the images you wish to watch).

This setting optimizes the operation of the progressive scanning circuit for playing film materials. Normally set it to AUTO. If the picture seems unnatural, switch this to ON or OFF.

Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is set to progressive.

Option(s)

ON

OFF

AUTO

PURE

480p/576p

720p

1080i

1080p

1080/24p

4K

4K/24p

AUTO

ON

OFF c

–4 to +4 d

Default: 0

Setting

STREAM

(Stream Smoother)

<e>

V.ADJ

(Advanced Video Adjust)

YNR

<d, e>

CNR

<d, e>

BNR

<d, e>

MNR

<d, e>

What it does

This improves elements that reduce picture quality mainly noticeable in network contents, such as mosquito noise and block noise.

When AUTO is selected, this unit’s Stream Smoother function automatically turns on when network contents are played on the player supporting Stream Smoother Link and connected to this unit by HDMI (assuming that integrated operation with the Control with

HDMI function is set). (Stream Smoother Link)

Option(s)

OFF

ON

AUTO

Sets the optimum picture quality for the type of monitor that is connected. Select PDP for plasma displays, LCD for liquid crystal monitors, FPJ for front projectors, PRO for professional monitors. If you want to adjust the picture quality settings to your personal tastes, select MEMORY.

PDP

LCD

FPJ

PRO

MEMORY

Reduces noise in the luminance (Y) signal.

c c

0 to +8 d

Default: 0

d

(The image is only an example for checking the effect.)

Reduces noise in the input’s color (C) signal.

c

d

(The image is only an example for checking the effect.)

Reduces block noise (block-shaped distortion generated upon MPEG compression) in the picture.

c

0 to +8 d

Default: 0

c c

0 to +8 d

Default: 0

d

(The image is only an example for checking the effect.)

Reduces mosquito noise (distortion generated at the contours of the picture upon MPEG compression) in the picture.

c c

0 to +8 d

Default: 0

d

(The image is only an example for checking the effect.)

 

69

09

Setting

DETAIL

<d, e>

BRIGHT

(Brightness)

<d, e>

CONTRAST

<d, e>

HUE

<d, e>

What it does

Adjusts how sharp edges appear.

c

d

(The image is only an example for checking the effect.)

Adjusts the overall brightness.

c

0

d

(The image is only an example for checking the effect.)

Adjusts the contrast between light and dark.

c

0

d

(The image is only an example for checking the effect.)

Adjusts the red/green balance.

c

0

d

(The image is only an example for checking the effect.)

Option(s)

c

0 to +8 d

Default: 0 c

–6 to +6 d

Default: 0 c

–6 to +6 d

Default: 0 c

–6 to +6 d

Default: 0

Using other functions

Setting What it does

Adjusts saturation from dull to bright.

Option(s)

c

CHROMA

(Chroma Level)

<d, e> c

–6 to +6 d

Default: 0

0

BLK SETUP

(Black Setup)

<f>

ASP

(Aspect)

<g>

d

(The image is only an example for checking the effect.)

Sets the black level according to the video input signal.

Normally select 0. If the black level is too bright due to the combination with the connected monitor, select 7.5.

Specifies the aspect ratio when input signals are output at the HDMI output. Make your desired settings while checking each setting on your display (if the image doesn’t match your monitor type, cropping or black bands appear).

0

7.5

THROUGH

NORMAL a ! The default value changes depending on the type of input (

page 74

).

! If the video picture deteriorates when this settings is switched ON, switch it OFF.

! When connected to a video device using the component video input, set this setting to ON and watch with the HDMI output.

b ! When set to a resolution with which the TV (monitor) is not compatible, no picture is output. Also, in some cases no picture will be output due to copyright protection signals. In this case, change the setting.

! When AUTO is selected, the resolution is selected automatically according to the capacity of the TV (monitor) connected by

HDMI. When PURE is selected, the signals are output with the same resolution as when input (see

About the video converter on page 24

).

! When 1080/24p or 4K/24p is selected, the movement may be unnatural or the picture unclear, depending on the video signal being input. In this case, set the resolution to something other than 1080/24p or 4K/24p.

! When PURE is selected and the input signal is 480i, the on-screen display cannot be displayed.

c

! P.MOTION is disabled when PCINEMA is set to ON.

! This setting have the effect only for pictures recorded in the interlaced scan format (480i/576i or 1080i signals).

d Adjustment is not possible unless V.ADJ (Advanced Video Adjust) is set to MEMORY.

e

! This setting is only displayed when the video signals below are being input:

— 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i analog video signals

— 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 1080p24 HDMI video signals f This adjustment is only possible when 480i signals are being input from the composite video jacks.

g ! If the image doesn’t match your monitor type, adjust the aspect ratio on the source component or on the monitor.

! This setting is only displayed when 480i/p or 576i/p video signals are being input.

 

70

09

Using other functions

Switching the output (OUTPUT PARAMETER)

You can press OUT P. to switch the output of speaker terminals or HDMI terminals to be played.

Switching the speaker terminals

If you selected Normal(SB/FH), Normal(SB/FW) or Speaker B at Speaker system setting on page 89 , you can

switch between speakers using the OUT P. button. If you selected Front Bi-Amp, ZONE 2 or HDZONE, the button will simply switch your main speaker terminals on or off.

1 Press OUT P..

! You can perform the same operation by pressing SPEAKERS on the front panel.

Switching the HDMI output

Set which terminal to use when outputting video and audio signals from the HDMI output terminals.

The HDMI OUT 1 terminal is compatible with the Control with HDMI function.

1 Press OUT P..

Please wait a while when Please wait ... is displayed.

The output switches among OUT 1+2, OUT 1, OUT 2 and OFF each time the button is pressed.

! The synchronized amp mode is canceled when the HDMI output is switched. If you wish to use the synchronized amp mode, switch to OUT 1, then select the synchronized amp mode on the TV using the TV’s remote control.

! When MAIN/HDZONE is set to HDZONE, it is not possible to switch to OUT 2 (

page 94 ).

k/l to switch the speaker terminals to be played.

As mentioned above, if you have selected Front Bi-Amp, ZONE 2 or HDZONE, the button will simply switch your main speaker terminal (A) on or off.

Press repeatedly to choose a speaker terminal option:

When you select Normal(SB/FH), you can select from:

! SP: SB/FH ON – Surround back or front height channels are added to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output. The surround back and front height channels are switched automatically according to the audio input signal.

! SP: SB ON – Surround back channels are added to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.

! SP: FH ON – Front height channels are added to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.

! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the speakers (Pre-AMP mode).

When you select Normal(SB/FW), you can select from:

! SP: SB/FW ON – Surround back or front wide channels are added to the front, center and surround channels

(maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output. The surround back and front wide channels are switched automatically according to the audio input signal.

! SP: SB ON – Surround back channels are added to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.

! SP: FW ON – Front wide channels are added to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.

! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the speakers (Pre-AMP mode).

When you select Speaker B, you can select from:

! SP: A ON – Sound is output from the A-speaker terminals (up to 7 channels (including surround back channels), depending on the source).

! SP: B ON – Sound is output from the two speakers connected to the B-speaker terminals. Multichannel sources will not be heard.

! SP: A+B ON – Sound is output from the A-speaker terminals (up to 5 channels, depending on the source), the two speakers connected to the B-speaker terminals, and the subwoofer. The sound from the B-speaker terminals will be the same as the sound from the A-speaker terminals (multichannel sources will be downmixed to

2 channels).

! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the speakers (Pre-AMP mode).

Changing the channel level while listening

Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the overall balance of your speaker system, an important factor when setting up a home theater system.

1 Press CH LV..

3 Adjust the volume using

k/l.

The volume can be adjusted in the range of -12.0dB to +12.0dB, 0.5 dB steps.

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

Input Volume Absorber

This can be used to correct for the difference in volume between input sources.

1 Switch to the input whose volume you want to adjust.

2 Press CH LV..

4 Adjust the volume using

k/l.

The volume can be adjusted in the range of -12.0dB to +12.0dB, 0.5 dB steps.

5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

 

Notes

! The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in

Manual speaker setup on page 89

. However, if

SP: B ON is selected above, no sound is heard from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).

! All speaker systems (except Speaker B connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.

71

09

Using other functions

Using the MULTI-ZONE controls

The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust the sub zone volume and select sources. See

ZONE 2 remote controls and HDZONE remote controls on page 72

.

Important

The settings must be changed at ZONE Setup in order to use the HDZONE function (

page 94 ).

1 Press the button on the front panel for the zone you want to operate (ZONE 2 ON/OFF or

HDZONE ON/OFF).

The zone switches between on and off each time the button is pressed.

The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the MULTI-ZONE control has been switched ON.

2 Press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the sub zone(s) you want.

! When the receiver is on, make sure that any operations for the sub zone are done while ZONE and your selected sub zone(s) show in the display. If this is not showing, the front panel controls affect the main zone only.

If the receiver is in standby, the display is dimmed, and ZONE and your selected sub zone(s) continue to show in the display.

3 Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source for the zone you have selected.

For example, ZONE 2 SAT/CBL sends the source connected to the SAT/CBL inputs to the primary (ZONE 2) sub room.

! If you select TUNER, you can use the tuner controls to select a preset station (see Saving station presets

on

page 49

if you’re unsure how to do this). The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time.

Therefore, changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other zone. Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.

4 Use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the volume for the sub zone.

When Speaker System is set to anything other than ZONE 2, the volume output from the receiver’s AUDIO

ZONE 2 OUT terminals can be fixed to –40 dB or 0 dB and the volume can be adjusted from the connected amplifier. If you want to adjust the volume from the connected amplifier, see

ZONE Setup on page 94

.

5 When you’re finished, press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL again to return to the main zone controls.

You can also press ZONE 2 ON/OFF or HDZONE ON/OFF on the front panel to switch off all output to the sub zone.

! You won’t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you’ve switched off the MULTI-ZONE control first.

! If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE feature for a while, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in standby.

ZONE 2 remote controls

Before operation, hold down Z2 on the remote control (for 1.5 seconds) until the remote control LED flashes one time.

The following table shows the possible ZONE 2 remote controls:

Button(s)

u

ALL

Input function buttons

What it does

Switches on/off power in the sub zone.

Use to select the input function in the sub zone.

Use to select the input function directly (this may not work for some functions) in the sub zone.

VOLUME +/

<a>

MUTE

<a>

Use to set the listening volume in the sub zone.

Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).

a ! The volume cannot be adjusted on the receiver if Volume Level at ZONE 2 Setup under ZONE Setup is set to –40 dB Fixed or 0 dB Fixed.

 

HDZONE remote controls

Before operation, hold down HDZ on the remote control (for 1.5 seconds) until the remote control LED flashes one time.

The following table shows the possible HDZONE remote controls:

Button(s)

u

ALL

Input function buttons

What it does

Switches on/off power in the HDZONE.

Use to select the input function in the HDZONE.

Use to select the input function directly (this may not work for some functions) in the

HDZONE.

VOLUME +/

<a>

MUTE

<a>

Use to set the listening volume in the HDZONE.

Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).

a You can operate this only when Speaker System is set to HDZONE.

Note

When the network function or iPod/USB input is selected using HDZONE, the video converter function is disabled. For that reason, video connected with the video cable or component cable is not output from the HDMI terminal. Also, upscaling of the HDMI input video cannot be performed. To enable the video converter function, turn off HDZONE or set HDZONE to some other input.

72

09

Using other functions

Making an audio or a video recording

You can make an audio or a video recording from the built-in tuner, or from an audio or video source connected to the receiver (such as a CD player or TV).

Keep in mind you can’t make a digital recording from an analog source or vice-versa, so make sure the components you are recording to/from are hooked up in the same way (see

Connecting your equipment on page 18

for more on connections).

! The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the tone controls, for example), and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal.

! Some digital sources are copy-protected, and can only be recorded in analog.

! Some video sources are copy-protected. These cannot be recorded.

Since the video converter is not available when making recordings (from the video OUT jacks) make sure to use the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder as you used to connect your video source (the one you want to record) to this receiver. For example, you must connect your recorder using Component video if your source has also been connected using Component video.

1 Select the source you want to record.

You can use the input function buttons on the remote control or the front panel INPUT SELECTOR dial.

2 Prepare the source you want to record.

Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, DVD etc.

3 Select the input signal according to the signal to be recorded.

Use the remote control’s AUDIO P. button.

4 Prepare the recorder.

Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the recording device and set the recording levels. Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if you are unsure how to do this. Most video recorders set the audio recording level automatically-check the component’s instruction manual if you’re unsure.

5 Start recording, then start playback of the source component.

Using the sleep timer

The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without worrying about the receiver being left on all night. Use the remote control to set the sleep timer.

% Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the sleep time.

30 min 60 min

Off 90 min

! You can check the remaining sleep time at any time by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing repeatedly will cycle through the sleep options again.

! The sleep timer is valid for all zones. If any zone is on, the sleep timer continues functioning.

Dimming the display

You can choose between four brightness levels for the front panel display. Note that when selecting sources, the display automatically brightens for a few seconds.

Turning off the display is effective for suppressing noise from the display that affects sound quality.

% Press DIMMER repeatedly to change the brightness of the front panel display.

! You can also choose to turn the display off. In this case, the FL OFF indicator lights.

Checking your system settings

Use the status display screen to check your current settings for features such as surround back channel processing and your current MCACC preset.

1 Press STATUS.

 

Network settings from a web browser

Network settings can be made using the browser on a computer connected to the same LAN as the receiver.

1 Press STANDBY/ON to switch on the receiver.

2 Turn on the computer’s power and launch the Internet browser.

3 Input the receiver’s IP address into the browser’s address input field.

Access the IP address“http://(the receiver’s IP address)” from a web browser. You can display the IP address of the unit on the unit’s display by pressing the STATUS button on the remote control.

When connected with the receiver, the AVNavigator menu screen appears in the browser.

4 On the AVNavigator menu screen, select Network Setup.

5 Select the item you want to set.

The information on the main unit display switches as shown below each time one of the buttons is pressed.

IP address f Audio format f Sampling frequency f MCACC memory f Auto phase control plus correction value f Input source to be played in ZONE 2 f Input source to be played in HDZONE f HDMI output setting f Subzone to which HDZONE is output

! For some settings, some items are not displayed.

3 When you’re finished, press STATUS again to switch off the display.

73

09

Using other functions

Resetting the system

Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s settings to the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this.

Set MULTI-ZONE to MULTI ZONE OFF.

! Disconnect the iPod and USB memory device from the receiver beforehand.

! Set the Control with HDMI to OFF (see

HDMI Setup on page 63

).

1 Switch the receiver into standby.

2 While holding down ENTER on the front panel, press u STANDBY/ON.

The display shows RESET c NO d.

3 Select ‘RESET’ using PRESET

k/l, then press ENTER on the front panel.

The display shows RESET? OK.

4 Press ENTER to confirm.

OK appears in the display to indicate that the receiver has been reset to the factory default settings.

! Note that all settings will be saved, even if the receiver is unplugged.

Default system settings

Setting

Digital Video Converter

SPEAKERS

Speaker System

Speaker Setting

Front

Center

FH/FW

Surr

SB

SW

Surround Position

Crossover

X-Curve

DIMMER

Inputs

See Input function default and possible settings on page 41 .

Input Volume Absorber All Inputs

HDMI

HDMI Audio

Control

Control Mode

ARC (Audio Return Channel)

PQLS

Standby Through

DSP

Power On Level

Volume Limit

Mute Level

Default

OFF

SB/FH ON

Normal(SB/FH)

SMALL

SMALL

SMALL

SMALL

SMALLx2

YES

ON SIDE

80Hz

OFF

Brightest

0dB

AMP

OFF

--- (OFF)

--- (OFF)

--- (AUTO)

OFF

LAST

OFF

FULL

74

Setting

Phase Control

Auto Sound Retriever iPod/USB, INTERNET RADIO, MEDIA

SERVER, FAVORITES, ADAPTER PORT input function

Other input functions

Sound Delay

Dual Mono

DRC

LFE Attenuate

Auto delay

Digital Safety

Effect Level

PL II Music Options

ALC (Auto Level Control)

Center Width

Dimension

Panorama

Center Gain Neo:X Options

PL IIz Options

Height Gain

All Inputs

Listening Mode (2 ch/multi ch)

Listening Mode (Headphones)

See also Setting the Audio options on page 67 for other default DSP settings.

MCACC

MCACC Position Memory

Channel Level (M1 to M6)

Speaker Distance (M1 to M6)

Standing Wave (M1 to M6)

EQ Data (M1 to M6)

ATT of all channels/filters

SWch Wide Trim

All channels/bands

EQ Wide Trim

Network

Network Standby

DHCP

Default

ON

ON

3

0

0dB

OFF

OFF

50

OFF

0 ms

CH1

AUTO

OFF

Neo:X CINEMA: 1.0

Neo:X MUSIC: 0.3

Neo:X GAME: 1.0

MID

AUTO SURROUND

STEREO

M1. MEMORY 1

0.0 dB

3.00 m

0.0 dB

0.0 dB

0.0 dB

0.0 dB

OFF

ON

 

Controlling the rest of your system

About the Remote Setup menu ....................................................................................................76

Operating multiple receivers ........................................................................................................76

Setting the remote to control other components....................................................................... 76

Selecting preset codes directly .....................................................................................................76

Programming signals from other remote controls .....................................................................77

Erasing one of the remote control button settings ....................................................................77

Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function ..........................................................78

Using All Zone Standby .................................................................................................................78

Setting the switching time of AV amplifier operation mode ....................................................78

Resetting the remote control settings .........................................................................................78

Controlling components ...............................................................................................................79

 

75

10

Controlling the rest of your system

About the Remote Setup menu

The Remote Setup mode is set by pressing the number button while pressing RCU SETUP. The different items on the Remote Setup menu are described below. For their setting procedures, refer to the explanations for the respective items.

Setting

Change RC mode

Preset recall

Code learning

Erase learning

Reset function

Operation mode switching time

All reset

What it does

If you have multiple Pioneer receivers, amplifiers, etc., this setting can be used to prevent other units from operating simultaneously when the remote control unit is operated. See

Operating multiple receivers on page 76 .

Preset codes can be set for the various input functions. The remote control codes of a number of other devices (including products of other brands) are preset in the remote control to allow these devices to be

operated. See Selecting preset codes directly

on

page 76

.

If the desired operations cannot be performed even though you have set the preset codes, the remote control signals of other devices can be learned directly. See

Programming signals from other remote controls on page 77 .

This function is used to erase remote control codes that have been learned. Codes learned for the different

input functions can be erased individually. See Erasing one of the remote control button settings on page

77

.

This is a function for resetting preset codes that have been set. Key resetting can be done for individual input functions. See

Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function on page 78 .

You can set to automatically switch to AV amplifier operation mode when a certain period of time elapses

after remote operation of each input function is finished. See Setting the switching time of AV amplifier operation mode on page 78 .

This is a function for resetting all remote control unit settings you have made to the defaults set upon shipment from the factory. See

Resetting the remote control settings

on

page 78

.

Setting the remote to control other components

Most components can be assigned to one of the input function buttons (such as DVD or CD) using the component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the remote.

However, there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote control will not work for the model that you are using.

If you can’t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control, you can still teach the remote individual commands from another remote control (see

Programming signals from other remote controls on page 77 ).

! With the TV buttons, the TV can be operated regardless of the input set for the remote control’s operation mode. When using one TV set, we recommend assigning the same TV’s preset codes to the TV INPUT button and the TV button. When using two TV sets, for better convenience assign the TV connected to the MONITOR

OUT terminals to the TV INPUT button, the other TV to the TV button.

! Devices may be assigned to the following input function buttons.

 

STANDBY/ON

BD

SOURCE CONTROL

DVD SAT HDMI

TV CD ALL

Notes

! You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing RCU SETUP.

! After one minute of inactivity, the remote automatically exits the operation.

INPUT

Operating multiple receivers

Up to four receivers can be operated discretely using this receiver’s remote control when using multiple receivers, provided they are of the same model as this receiver. The receiver to be operated is switched by inputting the preset code to set the remote control setting.

! Set the remote modes on the receivers before using this function (see

Remote Control Mode Setup on page

93

).

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘4’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP.

2 Press the number button for the receiver (“Receiver 1” to “Receiver 4”) you wish to operate.

For example, to operate “Receiver 2”, press ‘2’.

If the LED lights for one second, the setting has been successfully completed.

When the preset code is input, the LED flashes three times to indicate that the setting has failed.

76

Selecting preset codes directly

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘1’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP.

2 Press the input function button for the component you want to control.

To assign the preset codes of the TV to be operated with the TV function, press the TV INPUT button.

The LED of the remote control lights.

3 Use the number buttons to enter the 4-digit preset code.

See Preset code list on page 118

.

If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash, the setting has been successfully completed.

When the preset code is fully input, the LED flashes three times to indicate that the setting has failed. If this happens, enter the 4-digit preset code again.

4 Repeat steps 2 through 3 for the other components you want to control.

To try out the remote control, switch the component on or off (into standby) by pressing u SOURCE. If it doesn’t seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there is one).

5 Press RCU SETUP to exit the preset setup mode.

10

Controlling the rest of your system

Programming signals from other remote controls

If the preset code for your component is not available, or the available preset codes do not operate correctly, you can program signals from the remote control of another component. This can also be used to program additional operations (buttons not covered in the presets) after assigning a preset code.

The remote can store about 120 preset codes from other components (this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only).

Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be learned from other remote controls. The buttons available are shown below:

STANDBY/ON

TV

INPUT

VOL

SOURCE

1

4

7

CLR

8

0

2

5

3

6

9

Fav

CH

ENTER CH

3 Point the two remote controls towards each other, then press the button that will be doing the learning on this receiver’s remote control.

The LED flashes once, then stops flashing, remaining lit.

! The remote controls should be 3 cm apart.

3 cm

This receiver’s remote control

Other remote control

4 Press the corresponding button on the other remote control that is sending (teaching) the signal to this receiver’s remote control.

If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash, the setting has been successfully completed.

! If the LED flashes for five seconds, it means the memory is full. See

Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function on page 78

to erase a programmed button you’re not using to free up more memory (note that some signals may take more memory than others).

! Note that interference from TVs or other devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal.

! Some commands from other remote controls cannot be learned, but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or farther apart.

5 To program additional signals for the current component repeat steps 3 and 4.

To program signals for another component, exit and repeat steps 2 through 4.

6 Press RCU SETUP to exit the programming mode.

ENTER

RECEIVER

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘2’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To “learn” codes at the TV buttons, proceed to step 3.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP.

2 Press the input function button for the component you want to control.

The LED blinks once and flashes continuously.

Erasing one of the remote control button settings

This erases one of the buttons you have programmed and restores the button to the factory default.

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘8’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To erase operations registered at the TV buttons, proceed to step 3.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP.

2 Press the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased.

The LED flashes once.

3 Press and hold the button to be erased for three seconds.

If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been successfully completed.

4 Repeat step 3 to erase other buttons.

5 Press RCU SETUP to exit the erasing mode.

 

77

10

Controlling the rest of your system

Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function

This operation erases all the operational settings of other devices that have been programmed in one input function, and restores the factory default.

This function is handy for erasing all data programmed for devices no longer being used.

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘9’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP.

2 Press and hold the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased for three seconds.

To erase the operations registered at all the TV buttons, press the TV INPUT button for 3 seconds.

If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been successfully completed.

Using All Zone Standby

The All Zone Standby can be used to turn all zones to OFF when the receiver’s power is switched to standby.

Also, when using separate Pioneer amplifiers/receivers for the sub zones, they can also be set to standby simultaneously.

! In order to set the power of amplifiers/receivers connected to sub zones to the standby mode, the connected amplifiers/receivers must be installed or connected in such a way that they can receive remote control signals.

! The power of the amplifiers/receivers can be switched to standby with this operation even when using multiple

Pioneer amplifiers/receivers and their Remote Control Mode have been changed.

1 Press ALL ZONE STBY.

The LED continues to flash.

2 Press STANDBY/ON.

The receiver’s power switches to standby and all zones are turned off.

Resetting the remote control settings

Use this procedure to reset all the remote control’s settings to the factory default.

! When preset codes are set, all the signals learned in the input function buttons are cleared. This function is convenient when you want to reset some but not all of input function buttons.

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘0’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

2 Hold down the ENTER button for five seconds.

If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been successfully completed.

Default preset codes

Input function button

BD

DVD

HDMI

TV

CD

SAT/CBL

TV (INPUT)

ALL

Preset code

2255

2197

2144

0305

5000

6329

0305

2034

 

Setting the switching time of AV amplifier operation mode

! Default setting: The AV amplifier operation mode is not switched automatically.

After pressing SOURCE CONTROL to operate another device, you need to press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the mode to AV amplifier operation mode to operate this receiver.

You can set to automatically switch to AV amplifier operation mode when a certain period of time elapses after remote operation of each input function is finished.

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘5’ for three seconds.

The LED flashes once.

2 Press the number buttons of the time you wish to set.

! 1 – The mode is not automatically switched to AV amplifier operation mode.

! 2 – Switches in five minute.

! 3 – Switches in three minute.

! 4 – Switches in one minute.

! 5 – Switches in 30 seconds.

3 Press RCU SETUP to exit the setup.

78

10

Controlling components

This remote control can control components after entering the proper codes (see

Setting the remote to control other components

on

page 76 for more on this). Use the input function buttons to select the component.

STANDBY/ON SOURCE

TV

INPUT

VOL

TOP

MENU

HOME

MENU

ENTER

TOOLS

MENU

RETURN

Controlling the rest of your system

u

SOURCE

Number buttons

CLR

ENTER (CLASS) d e g m n o p

AUDIO

DISP

TV and Audio/Video components

Button(s)

i/j/k/l

ENTER

CH +/–

TV

POWER ON/

OFF

numerics

! (dot)

CH ENTER

EXIT/INFO

TOOLS/GUIDE/

EPG i/j/k/l

ENTER

HOME MENU

RETURN

ANT

AUDIO

DISPLAY

CH +/–

TV (Monitor) BD/DVD

POWER ON/

OFF

numerics

KURO LINK

CH ENTER

EXIT

POWER ON/

OFF

numerics

CLEAR

ENTER

TOP MENU

USER MENU i/j/k/l

ENTER

HOME MENU

TOOLS

<a> i/j/k/l

ENTER

HOME MENU

RETURN RETURN

AUTO SETUP

FREEZE

CH +/– d e g m

— n

AV SELECTION o

SCREEN SIZE

AUDIO

DISPLAY p

AUDIO

DISPLAY

Subtitle (CH +)

Popup menu

(CH –)

<a>

HDD/BDR/

DVR

POWER ON/

OFF

numerics

+

ENTER

TOP MENU

GUIDE i/j/k/l

ENTER

HOME MENU

RETURN d e g m n o p

AUDIO

DISPLAY

VCR

POWER ON/

OFF

numerics

— d e g m n

AUDIO

Subtitle (CH +) or CH +/–

CH +/– a Controls for BD.

CH +/–

SAT/CATV

POWER ON/

OFF

numerics

*

ENTER

LIST

GUIDE i/j/k/l

ENTER

HOME MENU

RETURN d e g m n o p

AUDIO

DISPLAY/INFO

 

1

4

7

CLR

8

0

2

5

3

6

9

AUDIO

DISP

CH

ENTER CH

RECEIVER

79

10

Audio/Video components

Button(s)

u

SOURCE

Number buttons

LD

POWER ON/OFF

numerics

CLR

+10

ENTER (CLASS) i/j/k/l

ENTER

d e g m n o p

AUDIO

DISP

a Controls for MD.

b Controls for SACD.

ENTER

TOP MENU

— i/j/k/l

ENTER

RETURN d e g m n o p

AUDIO

DISPLAY/INFO

CD/CD-R/SACD

POWER ON/OFF

numerics

>10/CLEAR

DISC/ENTER

LEGATO LINK

<b>

SACD SETUP

<b>

— d e g m n o p

PURE AUDIO

<b>

TIME

<b>

— d e g m n o p

MD/DAT

POWER ON/OFF

numerics

CLEAR

<a>

OPEN/CLOSE

<a>

TAPE

POWER ON/OFF

CLEAR

ENTER

MS c

— d e g m n o p

MS d e

/g/m/n

— m d n o e g p

AUDIO

DISP

CH +/–

TV (Projector)

Button(s)

u

SOURCE

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

9

0

CLR

ENTER (CLASS) i/j/k/l

ENTER

80

Controlling the rest of your system

 

TV (Projector)

POWER ON

MOVIE

STANDARD

DYNAMIC

USER1

USER2

USER3

COLOR+

SHARP+

GAMMA

COLOR–

SHARP–

COLOR TEMP

EXIT

INFO i/j/k/l

ENTER

TEST

HIDE

MENU

HDMI1

HDMI2

COMP.

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

BRIGHT–

BRIGHT+

POWER OFF

ASPECT

CONTRAST+/–

The Advanced MCACC menu

Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu ....................................................82

Automatic MCACC (Expert)...........................................................................................................82

Manual MCACC setup ...................................................................................................................84

Checking MCACC Data ..................................................................................................................86

Data Management .........................................................................................................................87

 

81

11

The Advanced MCACC menu

Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu

The Advanced MCACC (Multi Channel ACoustic Calibration) system was developed in Pioneer’s laboratories with the aim of making it possible for home users to perform adjustments of the same level as in a studio easily and with high precision. The acoustic characteristics of the listening environment are measured and the frequency response is calibrated accordingly to allow high precision, automatic analysis and optimal calibration of the sound field to bring it closer to a studio environment than ever before. Furthermore, while it was previously difficult to eliminate standing waves, this receiver is equipped with a standing wave control function using a unique process to perform acoustic analysis and reduce their influence.

This section describes how to calibrate the sound field automatically and fine-adjust the sound field data manually.

1 Press STANDBY/ON to switch on the receiver and your TV.

Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.

2 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

! Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the HOME MENU.

3 Select ‘Advanced MCACC’ from the HOME MENU, then press ENTER.

4 Select the setting you want to adjust.

! Full Auto MCACC – See

Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 39

for a quick and effective automatic surround setup.

! Auto MCACC – See

Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 82 for a more detailed MCACC setup.

! Manual MCACC – Fine-tunes your speaker settings and customizes the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see

Manual

MCACC setup on page 84 ).

! Demo – No settings are saved and no errors occur. When the speakers are connected to this receiver, the test tone is output repeatedly. Press RETURN to cancel the test tone.

Automatic MCACC (Expert)

If your setup requires more detailed settings than those provided in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 39

, you can customize your setup options below. You can calibrate your system differently for up to six different MCACC presets, which are useful if you have different listening positions depending on the type of source (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the

TV).

2 Select the parameters you want to set.

Use i/j to select the item, then use k/l to set.

! Auto MCACC – The default is ALL (recommended), but you can limit the system calibration to only one setting (to save time) if you want.

— When data measurement is taken (after selecting ALL or Keep SP System), the reverb characteristics data (both before- and after-calibration) that this receiver had been storing will be overwritten.

— When measurement is performed with other than SYMMETRY (after selecting ALL or Keep SP System), the reverberation characteristics after calibration cannot be predicted, so the graph for the characteristics after calibration (“After”) cannot be displayed. If you will need to display the graph for the characteristics after calibration (“After”), take the measurement using the EQ Professional menu in the Manual MCACC setup (

page 84

).

— The EQ Pro & S-Wave measurement is also taken when ALL or Keep SP System is selected. See

Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 85 for more on this.

— Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the respective MCACC preset. For details, see

Setting the Audio options on page 67

.

! EQ Type (only available when the Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wave) – This determines how the frequency balance is adjusted.

After a single calibration is performed, each of the following three correction curves can be stored separately in the MCACC memory.

SYMMETRY implements symmetric correction for each pair of left and right speakers to flatten the frequency-amplitude characteristics.

ALL CH ADJ is a ‘flat’ setting where all the speakers are set individually so no special weighting is given to any one channel.

FRONT ALIGN sets all speakers in accordance with the front speaker settings (no equalization is applied to the front left and right channels).

If you selected ALL or Keep SP System as your Auto MCACC menu, you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the SYMMETRY, ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN settings.

EQ of subwoofer is automatically set when in ALL CH ADJ mode.

! STAND.WAVE Multi-Point (only available when the Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wave) – In addition to measurements at the listening position, you can use two more reference points for which test tones will be analyzed for standing waves. This is useful if you want to get a balanced ‘flat’ calibration for several seating positions in your listening area. Place the microphone at the reference point indicated on-screen and note that the last microphone placement will be at your main listening position:

 

2nd reference

point

1

3rd reference

point

2

Important

! Make sure the microphone/speakers are not moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.

! The screen saver will automatically appear after five minutes of inactivity.

CAUTION

! The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are output at high volume.

1 Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the Advanced MCACC menu, then press ENTER.

If the Advanced MCACC screen is not displayed, refer to Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu on page 82 .

3

Main listening

position

82

11

The Advanced MCACC menu

3 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.

Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

MULTI-ZONE

CONTROL

SPEAKERS iPod iPhone

DIRECT CONTROL

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT STATUS

HDZONE

ON/OFF

PHASE

CONTROL

PHONES

MCACC

SETUP MIC 5V 1 A

BAND

HDMI 5 INPUT

TUNER EDIT

Microphone

Tripod

If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If you do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the microphone.

! It may not be possible to measure correctly if the microphone is placed on a table, sofa, etc.

4 When you’re finished setting the options, select START then press ENTER.

5 Follow the instructions on-screen.

6 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish outputting test tones.

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while it’s doing this.

! With error messages (such as Too much ambient noise! or Check microphone.), select RETRY after check-

ing for ambient noise (see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 40

) and verifying the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and continue.

! Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.

7 If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI screen.

The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the actual speakers you have.

If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed, the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in step 8.

! If you see an ERR message (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a problem with the speaker connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use i/j to select the speaker and k/l to change the setting and continue.

! If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected.

connections.

— If the connections were wrong, turn off the power, disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly.

After this, perform the Auto MCACC procedure again.

— If the connections were right, select GO NEXT and continue.

8 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs more test tones to determine the optimum receiver settings.

Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.

! If you selected a STAND.WAVE Multi-Point setup (in step 2), you will be asked to place the mic at the 2nd and 3rd reference points before finally placing it at your main listening position.

9 The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and the Advanced MCACC menu reappears automatically.

The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using the Manual MCACC setup menu (starting below) or

Manual SP Setup menu (starting on page 89 ).

! Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm (5 inches) will end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the

Manual speaker setup

on

page 89 .

! The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.

! If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we recommend adjusting the settings manually.

You can also choose to view the settings by selecting individual parameters from the MCACC Data Check screen

(see Checking MCACC Data on page 86

).

Press RETURN after you have finished checking each screen. When you’re finished, select RETURN to go back to the HOME MENU.

Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Auto MCACC Setup.

 

83

11

The Advanced MCACC menu

Manual MCACC setup

You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup menu to make detailed adjustments when you’re more familiar with the system. Before making these settings, you should have already completed

Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 39 .

You only need to make these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new speakers).

CAUTION

! The test tones used in the Manual MCACC setup are output at high volume.

Important

! Press the MCACC button while the pertinent setup screens are displayed to select MCACC presets.

! For some of the settings below, you’ll have to connect the setup microphone to the front panel and place it about ear level at your normal listening position. Press HOME MENU to display the HOME MENU before you connect the microphone to this receiver.

! See

Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 40

for notes regarding high background noise levels and other possible interference.

! If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and turn up the volume to the middle position.

1 Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the Advanced MCACC menu.

See Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu on page 82

if you’re not already at this screen.

2 Select the setting you want to adjust.

If you’re doing this for the first time, you might want to make these settings in order.

! Fine Channel Level – Make fine adjustments to the overall balance of your speaker system (see Fine Channel

Level on page 84

).

! Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay settings for your speaker system (see Fine Speaker Distance on page

84

).

! Standing Wave – Control overly resonant low frequencies in your listening room (see

Standing Wave

on

page 85

).

The last two settings are specifically for customizing the parameters explained in

Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 85 :

! EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency balance of your speaker system while listening to test tones (see

Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 85

).

! EQ Professional – Calibrate your system based on the direct sound coming from the speakers and make detailed settings according to your room’s reverb characteristics (see

Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 85 ).

Fine Channel Level

! Default setting: 0.0dB (all channels)

You can achieve better surround sound by properly adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system. You can adjust the Channel Level of each speaker in 0.5 dB increments. The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the

Manual speaker setup on page 89

.

1 Select ‘Fine Channel Level’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.

The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference level.

2 Adjust the level of the left channel.

This will be the reference speaker level, so you may want to keep the level around 0.0dB so that you’ll have plenty of room to adjust the other speaker levels.

! After pressing ENTER, test tones will be output.

84

3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels (+/–12.0 dB) as necessary.

Use k/l to adjust the volume of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker. When it sounds like both tones are the same volume, press j to confirm and continue to the next channel.

! For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will change depending on which speaker you select.

! If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply use i/j to select it.

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.

 

Fine Speaker Distance

! Default setting: 3.00 m (all speakers)

For proper sound depth and separation with your system, it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 1 cm increments. The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may not

achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 89 .

1 Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.

2 Adjust the distance of the left channel from the listening position.

3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance as necessary.

Use k/l to adjust the delay of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker.

Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the target channel. From the listening position, face the two speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each speaker. Try to make the two tones sound as if they are arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of you and between your arm span.

! If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your speakers very slightly.

! The subwoofer’s test tone differs in tone from other channels. Adjust so that the sound of the subwoofer can be heard distinctly. Note that when adjusting the subwoofer, depending on the low frequency response of your speaker, it may be difficult to hear the change even when the setting is increased or decreased or when the position of the speaker is changed. Note that it may be difficult to compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup (depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker).

When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up, press j to confirm and continue to the next channel.

! For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will change depending on which speaker you select.

! If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply use i/j to select it.

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.

11

The Advanced MCACC menu

Standing Wave

! Default setting: ON/ATT 0.0dB (all filters)

Acoustic standing waves occur when, under certain conditions, sound waves from your speaker system resonate mutually with sound waves reflected off the walls in your listening area. This can have a negative effect on the overall sound, especially at certain lower frequencies. Depending on speaker placement, your listening position, and ultimately the shape of your room, it results in an overly resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The Standing Wave

Control uses filters to reduce the effect of overly resonant sounds in your listening area. During playback of a source, you can customize the filters used for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC presets.

! Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection.

1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.

2 Adjust the parameters for the Standing Wave Control.

! Filter Channel – Select the channel to which you will apply the filter(s): MAIN (all except center channel and subwoofer), Center or SW (subwoofer).

! TRIM (only available when the filter channel above is SW) – Adjust the subwoofer channel level (to compensate for the difference in output post-filter).

! Freq / Q / ATT – These are the filter parameters where Freq represents the frequency you will be targeting and Q is the bandwidth (the higher the Q, the narrower the bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation (ATT, the amount of reduction to the targeted frequency).

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.

Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust

! Default setting: ON/0.0dB (all channels/bands)

Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room equalizer for your speakers (excluding the subwoofer). It works by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics that can color the original source material (providing a ‘flat’ equalization setting). If you’re not satisfied with the adjustment provided in

Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 39

or

Automatic MCACC (Expert)

on

page 82 , you can also adjust these settings manually to get a frequency balance

that suits your tastes.

1 Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.

2 Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to your liking.

Use i/j to select the channel.

Use k/l to select the frequency and i/j to boost or cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go back to the top of the screen and press k to return to Ch, then use i/j to select the channel.

! The OVER! indicator shows in the display if the frequency adjustment is too drastic and might distort. If this happens, bring the level down until OVER! disappears from the display.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.

Notes

! Changing the frequency curve of one channel too drastically will affect the overall balance. If the speaker balance seems uneven, you can raise or lower channel levels using test tones with the TRIM feature. Use k/l to select TRIM, then use i/j to raise or lower the channel level for the current speaker.

! You cannot select 63Hz for the channel, which is set to SMALL using Speaker Setting.

! The frequencies that can be adjusted by the SW channel are 31Hz, 63Hz, 125Hz and 250Hz.

! Depending on the crossover frequency setting, some frequencies are less effective.

85

Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional

This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system based on the direct sound coming from the speakers.

Performing the Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional procedure is effective when the lower frequencies seem overly reverberant in your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’) as shown at Type A below, or when different channels seem to exhibit different reverb characteristics as shown at Type B.

! Type A: Reverberance of high vs. low frequencies

Level

Low frequencies

0

Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.

calibration range

80

High frequencies

0

Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.

calibration range

80

! Type B: Reverb characteristics for different channels

Level

Conventional MCACC

EQ calibration range

160

Time

(in msec)

Front L

Front R

Conventional MCACC

EQ calibration range

160

Time

(in msec)

Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional

1 Select ‘EQ Professional’, then press ENTER.

2 Select an option and press ENTER.

! Reverb Measurement – Use this to measure the reverb characteristics before and after calibration.

! Reverb View – You can check the reverb measurements made for specified frequency ranges in each channel.

— If the Reverb View procedure is performed after the Reverb Measurement operation, depending on the standing wave control setting, differences may appear on the reverb graph. With the Auto MCACC function, the reverberations are measured with the standing waves controlled, so the reverb characteristics graph shows the characteristics with the effect of the standing waves eliminated. By contrast, the

Reverb Measurement function measures the reverberations without controlling the standing waves, so the graph indicates the reverb characteristics including the effect of the standing waves. If you wish to check the reverb characteristics of the room itself (with the standing waves as such), we recommend using the Reverb Measurement function.

! Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the time period that will be used for frequency adjustment and calibration, based on the reverb measurement of your listening area. Note that customizing system calibration using this setup will alter the settings you made in

Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full

Auto MCACC)

on

page 39 or

Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 82 and is not necessary if you’re satis-

fied with these settings.

 

11

The Advanced MCACC menu

3 If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’, select EQ ON or EQ OFF, and then START.

The following options determine how the reverb characteristics of your listening area are displayed in

Reverb View:

! EQ OFF – You will see the reverb characteristics of your listening area without the equalization performed by this receiver (before calibration).

! EQ ON – You will see the reverb characteristics of your listening area with the equalization performed by this receiver (after calibration). Note that the EQ response may not appear entirely flat due to adjustments necessary for your listening area.

— The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use another MCACC preset, press MCACC to select the MCACC memory you want to store.

— After auto calibration with EQ Type : SYMMETRY (Auto MCACC, etc.), the graph for the inferred reverb characteristics can be displayed by selecting Reverb View. To display the actually measured reverb characteristics after EQ calibration, measure with EQ ON.

When the reverb measurement is finished, you can select Reverb View to see the results on-screen. See

Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 101

for troubleshooting information.

4 If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can check the reverb characteristics for each channel.

Press RETURN when you’re done.

The reverb characteristics are displayed when the Reverb Measurement measurements are conducted.

Use k/l to select the channel, frequency and calibration setting you want to check. Use i/j to go back and forth between the three. The reverb characteristics graph before and after EQ calibration can be displayed by selecting Calibration : Before / After. Note that the markers on the vertical axis indicate decibels in 2 dB steps.

5 If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected, select the MCACC memory to be stored, then enter the desired time setting for calibration, and then select START.

! To specify the place where the MCACC memory is to be stored, press MCACC to select the MCACC memory you want to store.

Based on the reverb measurement above, you can choose the time period that will be used for the final frequency adjustment and calibration. Even though you can make this setting without reverb measurement, it is best to use the measurement results as a reference for your time setting. For an optimal system calibration based on the direct sound coming from the speakers, we recommend using the 30-50ms setting.

Use k/l to select the setting. Use i/j to switch between them.

Select the setting from the following time periods (in milliseconds): 0-20ms, 10-30ms, 20-40ms, 30-50ms,

40-60ms, 50-70ms and 60-80ms. This setting will be applied to all channels during calibration.

When you’re finished, select START. It will take about 2 to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish.

After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set, you are given the option to check the settings on-screen.

Checking MCACC Data

At the procedure of

Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 39 , the pro-

cedure of

Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 82

or after fine-adjusting at Manual MCACC setup on page 84

, you can check your calibrated settings using the GUI screen.

1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the HOME MENU.

3 Select the setting you want to check.

! Speaker Setting – Used to check the settings of the speaker systems. See

Speaker Setting on page 86

for more on this.

! Channel Level – Used to check the output level of the different speakers. See

Channel Level on page 86

for more on this.

! Speaker Distance – Used to check the distance to the different speakers. See

Speaker Distance

on

page

87 for more on this.

! Standing Wave – Used to check the standing wave control filter settings. See

Standing Wave

on

page 87

for more on this.

! Acoustic Cal EQ – Used to check the calibration values of the listening environment’s frequency response.

See Acoustic Cal EQ

on

page 87

for more on this.

4 Press RETURN to go back to the MCACC Data Check menu, repeating steps 2 and 3 to check other settings.

5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the HOME MENU.

 

Speaker Setting

Use this to display the speaker size and number of speakers. See

Speaker Setting on page 89

for more on this.

1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.

2 Select the channel you want to check.

Use i/j to select the channel. The corresponding channel on the layout diagram is highlighted.

Channel Level

Use this to display the level of the various channels. See

Channel Level on page 90

for more on this.

1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.

2 When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use

k/l to select the MCACC preset you want to check.

The level of the various channels set at the selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is displayed for channels that are not connected.

86

11

The Advanced MCACC menu

Speaker Distance

Use this to display the distance from the different channels to the listening position. See

Speaker Distance

on

page 90

for more on this.

1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.

2 When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use

k/l to select the MCACC preset you want to check.

The distance from the various channels set at the selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is displayed for channels that are not connected.

3 Select the setting you want to adjust.

! Memory Rename – Name your MCACC presets for easy identification (see

Renaming MCACC presets on page 87 ).

! MCACC Memory Copy – Copy settings from one MCACC preset to another (see Copying MCACC preset data on page 87 ).

! MCACC Memory Clear – Clear any MCACC presets that you don’t want (see

Clearing MCACC presets on page 87 ).

Standing Wave

Use this to display the standing wave related adjustment values for the various MCACC memories. See

Standing

Wave on page 85

for more on this.

1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.

2 When ‘Filter Channel’ is highlighted, use

i/j to select the channel for which you want to

check standing wave control.

The standing wave related calibration value for the selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset and its graph are displayed.

check.

Acoustic Cal EQ

Use this to display the calibration values for the frequency response of the various channels set in the different

MCACC presets. See

Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 85 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Acoustic Cal EQ’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.

2 When ‘Ch’ is highlighted, use

i/j to select the channel.

The calibration value for the frequency response of the selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset and its graph are displayed.

3 Press check.

Renaming MCACC presets

If you have several different MCACC presets that you’re using, you may want to rename them for easier identification.

1 Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the Data Management setup menu.

2 Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then select an appropriate preset name.

Use i/j to select the preset, then k/l to select a preset name.

3 Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary, then press RETURN when you’re finished.

You will return to the Data Management setup menu.

Copying MCACC preset data

If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see

Manual MCACC setup on page 84 ), we recom-

mend copying your current settings to an unused MCACC preset. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this will give you a reference point from which to start.

! The settings made in

Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 39

or

Automatic MCACC (Expert)

on

page 82 .

1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Copy’ from the Data Management setup menu.

2 Select the setting you want to copy.

! All Data – Copies all the settings of the selected MCACC preset memory.

! Level & Distance – Copies only the channel level and speaker distance settings of the selected MCACC preset memory.

3 Select the MCACC preset you’ll be copying the settings ‘From’, then specify where you want to copy them ‘To’.

Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC preset you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).

4 Select ‘OK’ to confirm and copy the settings.

When MCACC Memory Copy? is displayed, select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not copied.

Completed! shows in the GUI screen to confirm the MCACC preset has been copied, then you automatically return to the Data Management setup menu.

Data Management

This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets, allowing you to calibrate your system for different listening positions (or frequency adjustments for the same listening position). This is useful for alternate settings to match the kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).

From this menu you can copy from one preset to another, name presets for easier identification and clear any ones you don’t need.

! This can be done in

Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 39 or

Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 82

, either of which you should have already completed.

1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘Data Management’ from the HOME MENU.

87

Clearing MCACC presets

If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets stored in memory, you can choose to clear the calibration settings of that preset.

1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Clear’ from the Data Management setup menu.

2 Select the MCACC preset you want to clear.

Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).

3 Select ‘OK’ to confirm and clear the preset.

When MCACC Memory Clear? is displayed, select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not cleared.

Completed! shows in the GUI screen to confirm the MCACC preset has been cleared, then you automatically return to the Data Management setup menu.

 

The System Setup and Other Setup menus

Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu ............................................................ 89

Manual speaker setup ...................................................................................................................89

Network Setup menu ....................................................................................................................91

Checking the Network Information .............................................................................................92

MHL Setup ......................................................................................................................................92

The Other Setup menu ..................................................................................................................92

Making network settings using Safari......................................................................................... 95

Using Safari to set a friendly name ..............................................................................................96

Using Safari to update the firmware ...........................................................................................96

 

88

12

The System Setup and Other Setup menus

Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu

The following section describes how to change the speaker-related settings manually and make various other settings (input selection, OSD language selection, etc.).

! With factory default settings, the on-screen display will be output from all HDMI output terminals and displayed on any TV connected via HDMI cable. You can change where the screen is output in the

MAIN/HDZONE ( page 94 ) and HDMI output (

page 71 ) settings.

1 Press STANDBY/ON to switch on the receiver and your TV.

Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.

2 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

! Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the HOME MENU.

3 Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU, then press ENTER.

4 Select the setting you want to adjust.

! Manual SP Setup – Sets the type of connection used for surround back terminals and the size, number distance and overall balance of the connected speakers (see

Manual speaker setup on page 89 ).

! Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve connected to the digital, HDMI and component video inputs (see

The

Input Setup menu on page 41

).

! OSD Language – The GUI screen’s display language can be changed (see

Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language) on page 42 ).

! Network Setup – Conducts the setup necessary to connect this unit to the network (see

Network Setup menu on page 91 ).

! HDMI Setup – Synchronizes this receiver with your Pioneer component supporting Control with HDMI ( page

62

).

! MHL Setup – Changes the settings related to MHL (see

MHL Setup

on

page 92 ).

! Other Setup – Makes customized settings to reflect how you are using the receiver (see

The Other Setup menu on page 92 ).

Manual speaker setup

This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to optimize the surround sound performance. You only need to make these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new speakers).

These settings are designed to customize your system, but if you’re satisfied with the settings made in

Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 39

, it isn’t necessary to make all of these settings.

CAUTION

! The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup are output at high volume.

1 Select ‘Manual SP Setup’, then press ENTER.

See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 89

if you’re not already at this screen.

2 Select the setting you want to adjust.

If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:

! Speaker System – Specifies how you are using your surround back speaker terminals and B speaker terminals (

page 89

).

! Speaker Setting – Specifies the size and number of speakers you’ve connected (

page 89 ).

! Channel Level – Adjusts the overall balance of your speaker system (

page 90

! Speaker Distance – Specifies the distance of your speakers from the listening position (

page 90 ).

! X-Curve – Adjusts the tonal balance of your speaker system for movie soundtracks ( page 90 ).

3 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.

 

Speaker system setting

! Default setting: Normal(SB/FH)

There are several ways you can use the speaker terminals with this receiver. In addition to a normal home theater setup where they are used for the front height speakers or front wide speakers, they can be used for bi-amping the front speakers or as an independent speaker system in another room.

1 Select ‘Speaker System’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.

See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 89

if you’re not already at this screen.

2 Select the speaker system setting.

! Normal(SB/FH) – Select for normal home theater use with front height speakers in your main (speaker system A) setup.

! Normal(SB/FW) – Select for normal home theater use with front wide speakers in your main (speaker system

A) setup.

! Speaker B – Select to use the B speaker terminals to listen to stereo playback in another room (see

Switching the speaker terminals on page 71

).

! Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re bi-amping your front speakers (see

Bi-amping your speakers on page 22 ).

! ZONE 2 – Select to use the surround back speaker terminals for an independent system in another zone (see

Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 72 ).

! HDZONE – Select to use the surround back speaker terminals for an independent system in HDZONE (see

Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 72 ).

3 If you selected Normal(SB/FH), Normal(SB/FW), or Speaker B in Step 2, select the placement of the surround speakers.

In a 7.1-channel surround system with surround speakers placed directly at the sides of the listening position, the surround sound of 5.1-channel sources is heard from the side. This function mixes the sound of the surround speakers with the surround back speakers so that the surround sound is heard from diagonally to the rear as it should be.

Depending on the positions of the speakers and the sound source, in some cases it may not be possible to achieve good results. In this case, set the setting to ON SIDE or IN REAR.

! ON SIDE – Select when the surround speakers is positioned right beside you.

! IN REAR – Select when the surround speaker is positioned obliquely behind you.

4 When ‘Setting Change?’ is displayed, select Yes.

If No is selected, the setting is not changed.

You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

Speaker Setting

Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration (size, number of speakers and crossover frequency). It is a good idea to make sure that the settings made in

Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full

Auto MCACC) on page 39

are correct. Note that this setting applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be set independently.

1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.

89

12

The System Setup and Other Setup menus

2 Choose the set of speakers that you want to set, then select a speaker size.

Use k/l to select the size (and number) of each of the following speakers:

! Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or if you didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select SMALL to send the bass frequencies to the subwoofer.

! Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center speaker, choose NO

(the center channel is sent to the front speakers).

! FH – Select LARGE if your front height speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect front height speakers, choose

NO (the front height channel is sent to the front speakers).

— You can adjust this setting only when Speaker System setting is Normal(SB/FH).

— If the surround speakers are set to NO, this setting will automatically be set to NO.

! FW – Select LARGE if your front wide speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect front wide speakers, choose

NO (the front wide channel is sent to the front speakers).

— You can adjust this setting only when Speaker System setting is Normal(SB/FW).

— If the surround speakers are set to NO, this setting will automatically be set to NO.

! Surr – Select LARGE if your surround speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround speakers choose NO (the sound of the surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a subwoofer).

! SB – Select the number of surround back speakers you have (one, two or none). Select LARGEx2 or LARGEx1 if your surround back speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALLx2 or SMALLx1 to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround back speakers choose

NO.

— If you selected HDZONE, ZONE 2 or Front Bi-Amp (in

Speaker system setting on page 89

) you can’t adjust the surround back settings.

— If the surround speakers are set to NO, the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO.

! SW – LFE signals and bass frequencies of channels set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer when YES is selected. Choose the PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer to output bass sound continuously or you want deeper bass (the bass frequencies that would normally come out the front and center speakers are also routed to the subwoofer). If you did not connect a subwoofer choose NO (the bass frequencies are output from other speakers).

— If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS for the subwoofer. This may not, however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in the amount of bass due low frequency cancellations. In this case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good results, listen to the bass response with it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best. If you’re having problems, the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL for the front speakers.

If you select NO for the subwoofer the front speakers will automatically be fixed to LARGE. Also, the center, surround, surround back, front height and front wide speakers can’t be set to LARGE if the front speakers are set to

SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.

3 Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover frequency.

Frequencies below this point will be sent to the subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).

! This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or the subwoofer, and bass sounds playing back from those selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel.

! With Full Auto MCACC setup or Auto MCACC setup (ALL or Speaker Setting), the setting here will not apply and the crossover frequency will be automatically set. Crossover frequency is a frequency aimed at achieving the optimal sound field taking into account the bass capacity of all connected speakers and human aural characteristics.

90

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

Channel Level

Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the overall balance of your speaker system, an important factor when setting up a home theater system.

1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.

The test tones will start.

2 Adjust the level of each channel using

k/l.

Use i/j to switch speakers.

Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is emitted.

! If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take the readings from your main listening position and adjust the level of each speaker to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

Speaker Distance

For good sound depth and separation from your system, you need to specify the distance of your speakers from the listening position. The receiver can then add the proper delay needed for effective surround sound.

1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.

2 Adjust the distance of each speaker using

k/l.

You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 0.01 m increments.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

Note

For best surround sound, make sure the surround back speakers are the same distance from the listening position.

X-Curve

Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright when played back in large rooms. The X-Curve setting acts as a kind of re-equalization for home theater listening, and restores proper tonal balance of movie soundtracks.

1 Select ‘X-Curve’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.

2 Choose the X-Curve setting you want.

Use k/l to adjust the setting. The X-Curve is expressed as a downwards slope in decibels per octave, starting at 2 kHz. The sound becomes less bright as the slope increases (to a maximum of –3.0dB/oct). Use the following guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your room size:

≤36 ≤48 ≤60 ≤72 ≤300 ≤1000

Room size ( m 2 )

X-Curve

(dB/oct)

–0.5

–1.0

–1.5

–2.0

–2.5

–3.0

! If you select OFF, the frequency curve will be flat and the X-Curve has no effect.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

 

12

The System Setup and Other Setup menus

Network Setup menu

Make the settings for connecting the receiver to the Internet and using the network functions.

1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU.

3 Select ‘Network Setup’ from the System Setup menu.

4 Select the setting you want to adjust.

If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:

! IP Address, Proxy – Sets up the IP address/Proxy of this receiver (

page 91

).

! Network Standby – Even when the unit is in standby mode, it is possible to turn on the power of the unit from iControlAV5 (

page 91

).

! Friendly Name – The name of the receiver displayed on a computer or other device connected to the network

can be changed ( page 91 ).

! Parental Lock – Restricts usage of network functions ( page 92 ).

! Port Number Setting – Sets the numbers of the ports where signals from IP Control are received ( page 92

).

Proxy Hostname/Proxy Port

This setting is required when you connect this receiver to the Internet via a proxy server. Enter the IP address of your proxy server in the ‘Proxy Hostname’ field. Also, enter the port number of your proxy server in the

Proxy Port’ field.

1 Select ‘IP Address, Proxy’ from the Network Setup menu.

2 Select the DHCP setting you want.

When you select ON, the network is automatically set up, and you do not need to follow Steps 3. Proceed with

Step 4.

If there is no DHCP server on the network and you select ON, this receiver will use its own Auto IP function to determine the IP address.

! The IP address determined by the Auto IP function is 169.254.X.X. You cannot listen to an Internet radio station if the IP address is set for the Auto IP function.

3 Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, Primary DNS Server and

Secondary DNS Server.

Press i/j to select a number and k/l to move the cursor.

4 Select ‘OFF’ or ‘ON’ for the Enable Proxy Server setting to deactivate or activate the proxy server.

In case you select ‘OFF’, proceed with Step 7. In case you select ‘ON’, on the other hand, proceed with Step 5.

5 Enter the address of your proxy server or the domain name.

Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.

6 Enter the port number of your proxy server.

Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.

7 Select ‘OK’ to confirm the IP Address/Proxy setup.

 

IP address/Proxy setting

In case the router connected to the LAN terminal on this receiver is a broadband router (with a built-in DHCP server function), simply turn on the DHCP server function, and you will not need to set up the network manually.

You must set up the network as described below only when you have connected this receiver to a broadband router without a DHCP server function. Before you set up the network, consult with your ISP or the network manager for the required settings. It is advised that you also refer to the operation manual supplied with your network component.

! In case you make changes to the network configuration without the DHCP server function, make the corresponding changes to the network settings of this receiver.

IP Address

The IP address to be entered must be defined within the following ranges. If the IP address defined is beyond the following ranges, you cannot play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations.

Class A: 10.0.0.1 to 10.255.255.254

Class B: 172.16.0.1 to 172.31.255.254

Class C: 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.255.254

Subnet Mask

In case an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is directly connected to this receiver, enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP on paper. In most cases, enter 255.255.255.0.

Default Gateway

In case a gateway (router) is connected to this receiver, enter the corresponding IP address.

Primary DNS Server/Secondary DNS Server

In case there is only one DNS server address provided by your ISP on paper, enter it in the ‘Primary DNS Server’ field. In case there are more than two DNS server addresses, enter ‘Secondary DNS Server’ in the other DNS server address field.

91

Network Standby

Set so that the iControlAV5 function connected to the same LAN with the receiver can be used even while the unit is in standby status.

1 Select ‘Network Standby’ from the Network Setup menu.

2 Specify whether the Network Standby is ON or OFF.

! ON – Even when the unit is in standby mode, it is possible to turn on the power of the unit from the device iControlAV5 that is connected to the network.

! OFF – The iControlAV5 function is not available while the receiver is in standby mode (power consumption during standby can be suppressed).

Friendly Name

1 Select ‘Friendly Name’ from the Network Setup menu.

2 Select ‘Edit Name’ then select ‘Rename’.

If after changing the name you want to restore the name to the default, select Default.

3 Input the name you want.

Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.

12

The System Setup and Other Setup menus

Parental Lock

Set restrictions for using Internet services. Also set the password accompanying the usage restrictions.

! Upon shipment from the factory, the password is set to “0000”.

Important

When the INTERNET RADIO or FAVORITES input is selected, the setting made here cannot be reflected.

1 Select ‘Parental Lock’ from the Network Setup menu.

2 Input the password.

Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.

3 Specify whether to turn Parental Lock on or off.

! OFF – Internet services are not restricted.

! ON – Internet services are restricted.

4 If you want to change the password, select Change Password.

In this case, the procedure returns to step 2.

Port Number Setting

On this receiver, there can be up to 5 numbers of ports where signals are received.

1 Select ‘Port Number Setting’ from the Network Setup menu.

2 Select the port number you want to change.

3 Input the port number.

! Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.

! It is not possible to set the same port number more than once.

4 If there are other port numbers you want to change, repeat steps 2 and 3.

Note

We recommend setting the port number to 00023 or within the range of 49152 to 65535.

MHL Setup

Select whether or not to switch the input automatically to the MHL input when an MHL-compatible device is connected.

! Default setting: ON

1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

! Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the HOME MENU.

2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU, then press ENTER.

3 Select ‘MHL Setup’ from the System Setup menu.

4 Select the ‘Auto input switching’ from the MHL Setup menu.

! OFF – Does not automaticly switch to MHL input.

! ON – Automatically switches to MHL input.

6 Select ‘OK’, then press ENTER.

Notes

! This is only valid for MHL-compatible devices supporting this function.

! When the power is on, the MHL-compatible device is charged. (This receiver supports charging of devices up to 0.9 A.)

Checking the Network Information

The setting status of the following network-related items can be checked.

! IP Address – Check the IP address of this receiver.

! MAC Address – Check the MAC address of this receiver.

! Friendly Name

Friendly Name on page 91

.

1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘Network Information’ from the HOME MENU.

Display the setting status of the network-related items.

92

The Other Setup menu

The Other Setup menu is where you can make customized settings to reflect how you are using the receiver.

1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode, and then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU.

3 Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER.

4 Select the setting you want to adjust.

If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:

! Auto Power Down – Sets the power to turn off automatically when the receiver is not being used (

page 93

).

! Volume Setup – Sets up the volume-related operations of this receiver ( page 93

).

! Remote Control Mode Setup – Sets this receiver’s remote control mode ( page 93 ).

! Software Update – Use to update the receiver’s software and check the version (

page 93

! ZONE Setup – Use to make the sub zone-related settings ( page 94

).

! On Screen Display Setup – Sets whether or not to display the status on the display when the receiver is operated (

page 95

).

! Play ZONE Setup – Select the zone for playing the audio contents of devices in the home network (

page 95 ).

! Maintenance Mode – This is used to receive maintenance from a Pioneer service engineer or custom

installer ( page 95 ).

5 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.

 

12

The System Setup and Other Setup menus

Auto Power Down

The power can be set to turn off automatically if no operation has been performed for a specific amount of time with no audio or video signals being input to the receiver. When using ZONE 2 or HDZONE, the ZONE 2 or

HDZONE power can also be set to turn off, but for ZONE 2 or HDZONE the power turns off automatically after the amount of time set here even if signals are being input or operations have been performed.

Different times can be set for the main zone, ZONE 2 and HDZONE.

1 Select ‘Auto Power Down’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the zone you want to set and set the time after which the power turns off.

! MAIN – The time can be selected from among “15 min”, “30 min”, “60 min” and “OFF”. The power turns off after there has been no signal and no operation for the selected time.

! ZONE 2 – The time can be selected from among “30 min”, “1 hour”, “3 hours”, “6 hours”, “9 hours” and

OFF”. The power turns off after the selected time.

! HDZONE – The time can be selected from among “30 min”, “1 hour”, “3 hours”, “6 hours”, “9 hours” and

OFF”. The power turns off after the selected time.

Note

Depending on the connected devices, the Auto Power Down function may not work properly due to excessive noise or other reasons.

Volume Setup

You can set the maximum volume of this receiver or specify what the volume level will be when the power is turned on.

1 Select ‘Volume Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the Power ON Level setting you want.

The volume can be set so that it is always set to the same level when the receiver’s power is turned on.

! LAST (default) – When the power is turned on, the volume is set to the same level as when the power was last turned off.

! “---” – When the power is turned on, the volume is set to minimum level.

! –80.0dB to +12.0dB – Specify the volume to be set when the power is turned on, in steps of 0.5 dB.

It is not possible to set a volume level greater than the value specified at Volume Limit setup (see below).

3 Select the Volume Limit setting you want.

Use this function to limit the maximum volume. The volume cannot be increased above the level set here, even by operating VOLUME button (or the dial on the front panel).

! OFF (default) – The maximum volume is not limited.

! –20.0dB/–15.0dB/–10.0dB/–5.0dB/0.0dB – The maximum volume is limited to the value set here.

4 Select the Mute Level setting you want.

This sets how much the volume is to be turned down when MUTE is pressed.

! FULL (default) – No sound.

! –40.0dB/–20.0dB – The volume will be turned down to the level specified here.

5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

Remote Control Mode Setup

! Default setting: 1

This sets this receiver’s remote control mode to prevent erroneous operation when multiple units of the receiver are being used.

1 Select ‘Remote Control Mode Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the Remote Control Mode setting you want.

3 Select ‘OK’ to change the remote control mode.

4 Follow the instructions on the screen to change the remote control’s setting.

See Operating multiple receivers on page 76

.

5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

Software Update

Use this procedure to update the receiver’s software and check the version. There are two ways to update: via the

Internet and via a USB memory device.

Updating via the Internet is performed by accessing the file server from the receiver and downloading the file.

This procedure is only possible if the receiver is connected to the Internet.

Updating via a USB memory device is performed by downloading the update file from a computer, reading this file onto a USB memory device then inserting this USB memory device into the USB port on the receiver’s front panel. With this procedure, the USB memory device containing the update file must first be inserted into the USB port on the receiver’s front panel.

! If an update file is provided on the Pioneer website, download it onto your computer. When downloading an update file from the Pioneer website onto your computer, the file will be in ZIP format. Unzip the ZIP file before saving it on the USB memory device. If there are any old downloaded files or downloaded files for other models on the USB memory device, delete them.

http://www.pioneer.com.sg (for Southeast Asia)

http://www.pioneer.com.au (for Australia)

http://www.pioneer-india.in (for India)

http://www.pioneerhongkong.com.hk (for Hong Kong)

! If an update file does not exist in the Pioneer’s website, updating the software for the receiver is not necessary.

Important

! DO NOT unplug the power cord during updating.

! When updating via the Internet, do not disconnect the LAN cable. When updating via a USB memory device, do not disconnect the USB memory device.

! If updating is interrupted before it is completed, start updating over from the beginning.

! The receiver’s settings may be reset when the software is updated. Information on the models for which the settings are reset is provided on the Pioneer website. Check the website before updating.

1 Select ‘Software Update’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the update procedure.

! Update via Internet – The receiver checks whether updatable software is available via the Internet.

! Update via USB Memory – The receiver checks whether the USB memory device inserted into the USB port on the receiver’s front panel contains updatable software.

Accessing” is displayed and the update file is checked. Wait a while.

 

93

12

The System Setup and Other Setup menus

3 Check on the screen whether or not an update file was found.

If “New version found.” is displayed, the update file has been found. The version number and updating time are displayed.

If “This is the latest version. There is no need to update.” is displayed, no update file has been found.

4 To update, select OK.

The updating screen appears and updating is performed.

! The power turns off automatically once updating is completed.

Software Update messages

Status messages

FILE ERROR

Descriptions

Try disconnecting then reconnecting the USB device or storing the update file again. If the error still occurs, try using a different USB memory device.

No update file was found on the USB memory device. Store the file in the USB memory device’s root directory.

UPDATE ERROR 1 to

UPDATE ERROR 7

Turn the receiver’s power off, then turn it back on and try updating the software again.

Update via USB

If this message flashes, updating has failed. Update via a USB memory device. Put the update file on a

USB memory device and connect the device to the USB port. When the file is found, software updating starts automatically.

UE11

UE22

UE33

Updating has failed. Use the same procedure to update the software again.

ZONE Setup

Switches the sub-zone setting.

MAIN/HDZONE setting (setting for how to use the HDMI OUT 2 terminal)

1 Select ‘ZONE Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select ‘MAIN/HDZONE’, then press ENTER.

3 Set the usage of the HDMI OUT 2 terminal.

! MAIN: Select this to output the same input source as in the main zone.

After setting this to MAIN, exit the home menu, then press OUT P. and select the terminal for HDMI output

( page 71

).

! HDZONE: Use the HDMI output’s multizone function (HDZONE) to output an input source different from the

one in the main zone ( page 72

).

4 Select ‘OK’, then press ENTER.

ZONE 2/HDZONE setting

The volume setting and tone for the sub zones that can be used with this receiver can be changed and adjusted here.

! When making multi-zone connections using the AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT terminals and performing playback in Zone 2, you can set whether to adjust the Zone 2 volume on the receiver or to fix it to a specific volume

(–40 dB Fixed or 0 dB Fixed). This is set to Variable upon shipment from the factory, allowing the volume to be adjusted on the receiver. If you would like to adjust the volume from the connected amplifier, make the setting below.

! HDZONE can be set when Speaker System is HDZONE.

! HDZONE is set to Variable. It cannot be set to –40 dB Fixed and 0 dB Fixed.

94

CAUTION

! Note that when Volume Level is set to 0 dB Fixed, the audio output from the AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT terminals is set to the maximum. Also, depending on the volume setting on the connected amplifier, large volumes may be produced even when Volume Level is set to –40 dB Fixed.

1 Select ‘ZONE Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select a sub zone for which you wish to change the setting.

3 Select the Volume Level setting you want.

! Variable (default) – Adjusts the sound volume of the sub zone using this unit.

! –40 dB Fixed/0 dB Fixed – The Zone 2 volume level output from the receiver is fixed to the value set here.

4 Select the Power ON Level setting you want.

Sets the sound volume of the sub zone when the multi-zone function is used to turn on the sub zone. Volume can be set for ZONE 2 and HDZONE, respectively.

When Volume Level is set to –40 dB Fixed or 0 dB Fixed, the volume is fixed to that level, so the volume cannot be set here.

! LAST (default) – When MULTI-ZONE is turned on, the volume is set to the level set the last time you were listening to that zone.

! “---” – When MULTI-ZONE is turned on, the volume for that zone is set to the minimum.

! –80.0dB to 0dB – When MULTI-ZONE is turned on, the volume is set to the level set here. The volume can be set up to the value set at Volume Limit below.

5 Select the Volume Limit setting you want.

The maximum volume for the zone selected in step 2 can be set.

! OFF (default) – The maximum volume is not limited.

! –20.0dB/–10.0dB – The maximum volume is limited to the value set here.

6 Select the Mute Level setting you want.

The mute level for the zone selected in step 2 can be set.

This sets how much the volume is to be turned down when MUTE is pressed.

! FULL (default) – No sound.

! –40.0dB/–20.0dB – The volume will be turned down to the level specified here.

7 Adjust Lch Level and Rch Level.

The channel level for the zone selected in step 2 can be set.

The level can be adjusted between –12.0dB and +12.0dB, in 1 dB steps.

8 Select the TONE setting you want.

This can only be set when ZONE 2 is selected in step 2.

The bass and treble for ZONE 2 can be adjusted. When BYPASS is selected, the original sound is played as such.

When ON is selected, the BASS and TREBLE can be adjusted.

! When the speaker terminals are being used for Zone 2, the TONE settings cannot be made.

9 Adjust the bass (BASS) and treble (TREBLE) to your tastes.

This can only be set when ZONE 2 is selected in step 2 and ON is selected in step 8.

The BASS and TREBLE can each be adjusted between –10.0dB and +10.0dB, in 1 dB steps.

10 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

 

12

The System Setup and Other Setup menus

On Screen Display Setup

When the receiver is operated, its status (the input name, listening mode, etc.) is displayed superimposed over the video output on the display. This status display can be turned off by switching this setting to OFF. The setting can be made for the main zone and HDZONE, respectively.

! Default: ON (both the main zone and HDZONE)

1 Select ‘On Screen Display Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select and set the main zone or HDZONE for which you wish to change the setting.

3 Select the On Screen Display setting you want.

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

Notes

! The on-screen display is only displayed for video output from the HDMI terminal.

! When the video input signal is a 3D signal, the on-screen display may not be displayed.

! The size of the characters displayed differs according to the output resolution.

Play ZONE Setup

Select the zone for playing the audio contents of devices in the home network when using in the DMR mode.

! For playable DLNA-compatible network devices, see page 57 .

1 Select ‘Play ZONE Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the zone in which you want to play the audio contents.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

Notes

! If another zone is on, it may not be possible to play the audio contents. In this case, turn the other zone off, then play the audio contents.

! MAIN/HDZONE at ZONE Setup must be set to HDZONE in order to use the HDZONE function (

page 94 ).

Maintenance Mode

Only use this if so instructed by a Pioneer service engineer or custom installer.

Making network settings using Safari

1 Launch Safari on your computer.

2 Press Bookmark icon. Click Bonjour list (a), and then select this receiver’s name

(Friendly Name) (b) in Bookmark.

If Bonjour list is not displayed, access the IP address“http://(the receiver’s IP address)” from Safari.

a b

3 On the AVNavigator menu screen, select Network Setup.

4 Click IP, Proxy Setting.

5 Setup the network settings manually and then press Apply.

 

95

Note

This setting for the network has been confirmed for Mac OS X 10.7 and Safari 5.1.

12

Using Safari to set a friendly name

1 Launch Safari on your computer.

2 Press Bookmark icon. Click Bonjour list (a), and then select this receiver’s name

(Friendly Name) (b) in Bookmark.

If Bonjour list is not displayed, access the IP address“http://(the receiver’s IP address)” from Safari.

3 On the AVNavigator menu screen, select Network Setup.

4 Click Friendly Name.

5 Input a friendly name, then press Apply.

The System Setup and Other Setup menus

5 Press Start.

The firmware update prepare screen is displayed. If the screen does not switch automatically, click Click here.

 

Note

This setting for the network has been confirmed for Mac OS X 10.7 and Safari 5.1.

Using Safari to update the firmware

1 Launch Safari on your computer.

2 Press Bookmark icon. Click Bonjour list (a), and then select this receiver’s name

(Friendly Name) (b) in Bookmark.

If Bonjour list is not displayed, access the IP address“http://(the receiver’s IP address)” from Safari.

3 On the AVNavigator menu screen, select Network Setup.

4 Click Firmware Update.

6 Browse the latest firmware on your computer (a) and then press Upload (b).

Firmware files have the extension “fw”. Select a file with the extension “fw”.

The confirmation screen is displayed. If you continue the firmware update, press OK. Once the firmware update process starts, you cannot stop it. Wait until the file is uploaded (about one minute may be required depending on your LAN connection environment).

a b

7 The firmware upload status screen is displayed.

The upload process finished successfully.” will be shown when the update is completed.

Once updating is completed, the receiver’s power automatically turns off.

96

Note

This setting for the network has been confirmed for Mac OS X 10.7 and Safari 5.1.

FAQ

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................98

Power ..............................................................................................................................................98

No sound ........................................................................................................................................98

Other audio problems ...................................................................................................................99

ADAPTER PORT terminal .............................................................................................................100

Video .............................................................................................................................................100

Settings .........................................................................................................................................101

Professional Calibration EQ graphical output ...........................................................................101

Display ..........................................................................................................................................101

Remote control ............................................................................................................................102

HDMI .............................................................................................................................................102

MHL ...............................................................................................................................................103

Built-in AVNavigator ...................................................................................................................103

USB interface ................................................................................................................................104

iPod ...............................................................................................................................................104

Network........................................................................................................................................104

Wireless LAN ................................................................................................................................106

 

97

13

FAQ

Troubleshooting

Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work.

! If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.

If the problem is not solved after the troubleshooting below, if the screen freezes unexpectedly or if the buttons on the remote control or front panel stop working completely, do the following:

! Press u STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn off the power, then turn the power back on.

If this does not solve the problem, turn off the power again, then press and hold the u STANDBY/ON button on the front panel for at least five seconds. (The power turns on, then turns off after five seconds.)

! If the power cannot be turned off, press and hold u STANDBY/ON on the front panel for over five seconds. The power will turn off. In this case, the various settings made on the receiver may be cleared. (However, settings made when the power was turned off normally are not cleared.)

Symptom

The receiver suddenly switches off or the FL OFF indicator blinks.

AMP OVERHEAT blinks in the display and the FL OFF indicator flash and the power turns off.

HDZONE cannot be turned on.

The receiver suddenly power off or

ADVANCED MCACC flashes.

FAN STOP is displayed, then

iPod iPhone indicator blinks.

Remedy

There is a possibility that the power supply circuit of the receiver has failed. Wait at least one minute and then turn ON the power again. If the same symptom appears again after turning ON the power again, stop using the receiver, disconnect the power cable and request repair.

Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back on (see

Installing the receiver

on

page 9

).

Check whether the cables used to connect the speakers are short-circuited.

Wait at least 1 minute, then try turning the power on again.

The temperature within the unit has exceeded the allowablevalue.

Lower the volume level.

Set Output Setting at MAIN/HDZONE to HDZONE (

page 94 ).

The power unit is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

The built-in cooling fan is malfunctioning. Do not try switching the receiver on. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

 

Power

Symptom

The power does not turn on.

Power cannot be turned off.

(ZONE 2 ON is displayed.)

Power cannot be turned off.

(HDZONE ON is displayed.)

The receiver suddenly switches off or the iPod iPhone indicator blinks.

During loud playback the power suddenly switches off.

The unit does not respond when the buttons are pressed.

AMP ERR blinks in the display, then the power automatically switches off.

The ADVANCED MCACC blinks and the power does not turn on.

Remedy

Make sure that the power cord is plugged in to an active power outlet.

Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.

Press the ZONE 2 button on the remote control for 1.5 seconds and then press the u

STANDBY/ON button to turn OFF the power.

Press the HDZONE button on the remote control for 1.5 seconds and then press the u

STANDBY/ON button to turn OFF the power.

Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another set of wires. If so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are no stray strands.

The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

Turn down the volume.

Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the

Manual MCACC setup

on

page 84

.

Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down ENTER on the front panel, press u STANDBY/ON to set this receiver to the standby mode. Use TUNE i/j to select D.SAFETY cOFFd, and then use PRESET k/l to select 1 or 2 (select D.SAFETY c

OFFd to deactivate this feature). If the power switches off even with 2 switched on, turn down the volume. With 1 or 2 on, some features may be unavailable.

If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change your speaker settings to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS

(see Speaker Setting on page 89 ).

Try switching the receiver off, then back on again.

Try disconnecting the power cord, then connect again.

The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

No sound

Symptom

There is no sound output, the sound gets cut off, or there is noise present.

No sound is output when an input function is selected.

No sound is output from the front speakers.

No sound from the surround or center speakers.

Remedy

If Fixed PCM in audio parameter is set to ON, you will not be able to playback audio in formats other than PCM audio. For other audio formats than PCM audio, select OFF (See

Setting the Audio options on page 67

).

Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting (press OUT P.).

Make sure the correct input function is selected.

Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.

Make sure the correct input signal is selected (see Choosing the input signal

on

page

55

).

Check that the source component is connected properly (see

Connecting your equipment on page 18 ).

Check that the speakers are connected properly (see

Connecting the speakers

on

page

21

).

Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance mode isn’t

selected; select one of the surround listening modes (see Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes

on

page 53

).

Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page

89

).

Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level

on

page 90

).

Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 21 ).

98

13

FAQ

Symptom

No sound from surround back speakers.

No sound from front height or front wide speakers.

No sound from subwoofer.

No sound from one speaker.

Sound is produced from analog components, but not from digital ones (DVD, LD, CD, etc.).

No sound is output or a noise is output when Dolby Digital/DTS software is played back.

No sound when using the

HOME MENU.

Remedy

Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL, and the surround

speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting

on

page 89

).

Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 21

). If only one surround back speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the left channel speaker terminal.

Surround back speakers will not play while the Speaker System is set to Speaker B and audio is being played through speaker B.

When Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/FH) or Normal(SB/FW) and SP: FH ON or

SP: FW ON is selected with the OUT P. button, no sound will be output from the surround back speakers. Select SP: SB/FH ON, SP: SB/FW ON or SP: SB ON (see

Switching the speaker terminals

on

page 71

).

Check that the front height or front wide speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL, and the

surround speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 89 ).

When Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/FH) or Normal(SB/FW) and SP: SB ON is selected with the OUT P. button, no sound will be output from the front height or front wide speakers. Select SP: SB/FH ON, SP: SB/FW ON, SP: FH ON or SP: FW ON (see

Switching the speaker terminals on page 71

).

Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 21

).

Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume turned up.

If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.

Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see

Speaker Setting

on

page 89

).

The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the characteris-

tics of your other speakers (see Speaker Setting

on

page 89

).

If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change your speaker settings to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS

(see Speaker Setting on page 89 ).

Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or to a very quiet setting (see

Setting the

Audio options

on

page 67

).

Check the speaker level settings (see

Channel Level on page 90 ).

Check the speaker connection (see

Connecting the speakers on page 21 ).

Check the speaker level settings (see

Channel Level on page 90 ).

Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting

on

page 89

).

The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced effect listening modes, you may be able to create the missing channel (see

Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes on page 53 ).

Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see

Choosing the input signal on page

55 ).

Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is

connected to (see The Input Setup menu on page 41 ).

Check the digital output settings on the source component.

If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.

Check that your BD or DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.

Check the digital output settings or the HDMI audio output settings of your BD or DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal output is set to On.

If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.

If the HDMI input function is selected, sound is muted until exiting the HOME MENU.

Other audio problems

Symptom

Speaker switching sound (clicking sound) is heard from receiver during playback.

Broadcast stations cannot be selected automatically, or there is considerable noise in radio broadcasts.

Noise is output when scanning a

DTS CD.

When playing a DTS format LD there is audible noise on the soundtrack.

Can’t record audio.

Subwoofer output is very low.

Everything seems to be set up correctly, but the playback sound is odd.

The Phase Control feature doesn’t seem to have an audible effect.

Noise or hum can be heard even when there is no sound being input.

Can’t select some Input functions by the INPUT SELECTOR on the front panel or the ALL button on the remote control.

There seems to be a time lag between the speakers and the output of the subwoofer.

The maximum volume available

(shown in the front panel display) is lower than the +12dB maximum.

Remedy

Since ECO MODE 1 and ECO MODE 2 reduce the power consumption, the speakers are switched in function of the number of input channels. Because of this, a speaker switching sound (clicking sound) may be produced when the number of input channels is switched. If this bothers you, switch to a different listening mode.

Depending on the listening mode, the front height (or front wide) and surround back speakers may switch automatically in function of changes in the input audio. A speaker switching sound (clicking sound) will be heard from the receiver at this time. If this sound

bothers you, we recommend to change the speaker terminal option (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 71 ).

Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and secure to a wall, etc.

Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see

page 30

).

Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.

Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a fluorescent light, motor, etc. Switch off or move the other equipment, or move the AM antenna.

This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your player alters the digital information, making it unreadable, resulting in noise being output. Lower the volume when scanning.

Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see

Choosing the input signal on page 55 ).

You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an analog recording from an analog source.

For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t copy protected.

To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the front speakers to SMALL

(see Speaker Setting on page 89 ).

The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker terminals on the receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers (see

Connecting the speakers

on

page 21

).

If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or the lowpass cutoff is set to the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º (or depending on the subwoofer, the setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound).

Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see

Speaker Distance on page 90 ).

Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same power source are not causing interference.

Check the Input Skip settings in the Input Setup menu (see

The Input Setup menu

on

page 41 ).

Check the HDMI Input assignment in the Input Setup menu then try OFF (see The Input

Setup menu

on

page 41

).

See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC)

on

page 39

to set up your system again using MCACC (this will automatically compensate for a delay in the subwoofer output).

Check that the Volume Limit is set to OFF (see

Volume Setup on page 93 ).

The channel level setting may be over 0.0dB.

 

99

13

FAQ

Symptom

Certain listening modes or

HOME MENU items cannot be selected.

The volume level drops automatically.

Volume seems different when input is switched.

When HDZONE is ON, multi-channel audio sources are not output in the main zone.

No HDZONE sound is output.

Remedy

When Operation Mode is set to Basic, the Pioneer-recommended settings are made and not all of the functions can be used. To use all of the functions without restrictions, set

Operation Mode to Expert (see

Operation Mode Setup

on

page 42

).

Some functions cannot be selected, depending on the input signal and listening mode.

The temperature within the unit has exceeded the allowable value. Try moving the unit for

better ventilation (see Installing the receiver

on

page 9

).

Set the Channel Level setting to ALL, then adjust the volume of the respective input

sources (see Input Volume Absorber

on

page 71

).

When HDZONE is selected in Speaker System and also the same HDMI input is selected for both the main zone and HDZONE, 2-channel PCM audio sources are output from the main zone as well. To output multi-channel audio sources, set HDZONE to OFF or change the HDZONE input.

With HDZONE, multi-channel audio may not be output. In this case, set the audio output setting of your playback device to 2-channel PCM.

ADAPTER PORT terminal

Symptom

The Bluetooth wireless technology device cannot be connected or operated. Sound from the Bluetooth wireless technology device is not emitted or the sound is interrupted.

ADT OVERLOAD is displayed on the display.

Remedy

Check that no object that emits electromagnetic waves in the 2.4 GHz band (microwave oven, wireless LAN device or Bluetooth wireless technology apparatus) is near the unit. If such an object is near the unit, set the unit far from it. Or, stop using the object emitting the electromagnetic waves.

Check that the Bluetooth wireless technology device is not too far from the unit and that obstructions are not set between the Bluetooth wireless technology device and the unit.

Set the Bluetooth wireless technology device and the unit so that the distance between them is less than about 10 m and no obstructions exist between them.

Check that the Bluetooth ADAPTER and the ADAPTER PORT of the unit are correctly connected.

The Bluetooth wireless technology device may not be set to the communication mode supporting the Bluetooth wireless technology. Check the setting of the Bluetooth wireless technology device.

Check that pairing is correct. The pairing setting was deleted from this unit or the Blue-

tooth wireless technology device. Reset the pairing.

Check that the profile is correct. Use a Bluetooth wireless technology device that supports A2DP profile and AVRCP profile.

There is a problem in the power supply for the Bluetooth adapter. After turning OFF the power of the receiver, disconnect the Bluetooth adapter and insert the Bluetooth adapter again, then turn ON the power of the receiver.

If ADT OVERLOAD is displayed even though the above operation is repeated several times, there is a problem with the receiver or the Bluetooth adapter. Disconnect the power cable and request repair.

Video

Symptom

No image is output when an input is selected.

Noisy, intermittent, or distorted picture.

Video signals are not output from the component terminal.

The picture’s movement is unnatural.

Video parameters cannot be used.

Remedy

Check the video connections of the source component.

For HDMI, or when V.CONV is set to OFF and a TV and another component are con-

nected with different cords (in Setting the Video options

on

page 69

), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component. For the component video input, however, signals are only output from the HDMI output, so when using the component video input, set V.CONV to ON.

Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component video or HDMI cables (see

The Input Setup menu on page 41

).

Check the video output settings of the source component.

Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.

Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. If adjusting this receiver’s Resolution setting (in

Setting the Video options on page 69 ) and/or the resolution settings on your component or display doesn’t work, try switching V.CONV (in Setting the Video options

on

page 69

) to OFF.

When the HDMI OUT 1/2 setting of the output parameter function is set to OFF, set it to

ON.

If HDZONE is set to on, video images connected using a video cable or component cable

are not output from the HDMI terminal. To output video images, turn HDZONE off ( page

72

).

Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display device using the same type of connection (component or composite), then start playback again.

When a monitor only compatible with resolutions of 480i is connected to the component terminal and another monitor is connected to the HDMI terminal, the video signals may not be output to the monitor connected to the component terminal. If this happens, do the following:

— Turn off the power of the monitor connected to the HDMI terminal.

— Change the VIDEO P. menu RES setting (see

Setting the Video options

on

page 69

).

— Video signals from the HDMI terminal cannot be output to the component terminals.

Input the video signals from the player or other source to the composite or component terminals. When using the component terminal, assign it at Input Setup (see

The Input

Setup menu

on

page 41

).

When Resolution under VIDEO PARAMETER is set to 1080/24p or 4K/24p, the picture may not be displayed properly for some source materials. In this case, set the resolution to something other than 1080/24p or 4K/24p (

page 69

).

For audio only input (TUNER, CD, and TV), the video parameter function cannot be used.

Use for video or input with a GUI display.

Cannot be used when the HDZONE is ON. Turn OFF the HDZONE.

 

100

13

FAQ

Settings

Symptom

The Auto MCACC Setup continually shows an error.

After using the Auto MCACC Setup, the speaker size setting is incorrect.

Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker Distance setting properly.

The display shows KEY LOCK ON when you try to make settings.

Most recent settings have been erased.

The various system settings are not stored.

Certain listening modes or

HOME MENU items cannot be selected.

Feels like there is no subwoofer EQ effect.

Remedy

The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as low as pos-

sible (see also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 40 ). If the noise

level cannot be kept low enough, you will have to set up the surround sound manually

(

page 89

).

When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L

(Single) terminals.

To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround channel, not the surround back channel.

Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.

If Reverse Phase is displayed, try the following:

— The speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker connections.

— Depending on the type of speakers and their installation conditions, Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected. If this happens, select

GO NEXT and continue.

— If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), it may not be possible to properly identify the polarity.

There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air-conditioner, motor, etc. Switch off all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again.

Depending on a number of factors (bass reproduction capabilities of the speakers, room size, speaker placement, etc.) this may occur in some cases. Change the speaker setting manually in

Speaker Setting on page 89 , and use the ALL (Keep SP System) option for

the Auto MCACC menu in

Automatic MCACC (Expert)

on

page 82 if this is a recurring

problem.

Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals are matched up properly).

With the receiver in standby, press u STANDBY/ON for about 5 seconds while holding down SPEAKERS to disable the key lock.

The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.

Settings are only stored if all the zones are turned off. Turn off all the zones before unplugging the power cord.

Do not pull out the power cord while conducting the settings. (The settings will be stored when both the main zone and sub zone turn off. Turn off all zones before pulling out the power cord.)

When Operation Mode is set to Basic, the Pioneer-recommended settings are made and not all of the functions can be used. To use all of the functions without restrictions, set

Operation Mode to Expert (see

Operation Mode Setup

on

page 42

).

The effect becomes less when the set frequency value of the crossover frequency is low.

When setting a high frequency value, the subwoofer EQ effect becomes stronger. However, setting a higher crossover frequency increases the share that the subwoofer bears for low-frequency playback. For that reason, it is disadvantageous in terms of the phase point of view. Set to your preference.

Professional Calibration EQ graphical output

Symptom

The reverb characteristics graph after EQ calibration does not appear entirely flat.

EQ adjustments made using the

Manual MCACC setup do not appear to change the reverb characteristics graph after EQ calibration.

Lower frequency response curves do not seem to have been calibrated for

SMALL speakers.

Remedy

There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting ALL CH ADJ in the Auto MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to compensate for room characteristics to achieve optimal sound.

Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little or no adjustment needed.

The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after measurements.

Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not display these adjustments in the reverb characteristics graph after EQ calibration. However, these adjustments are taken into account by the filters dedicated to overall system calibration.

Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not change for speakers that have been specified as SMALL in the configuration, or do not output these frequencies.

Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations, no measurable sound is output for display.

Display

Symptom

The display is dark or off.

The OSD screen is not displayed.

Even through the input is switched,

DIGITAL does not light.

DIGITAL or DTS does not light when playing Dolby/DTS software.

When playing Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the receiver’s format indicators do not light.

When playing certain discs, none of the receiver’s format indicators light.

Remedy

Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness.

The on-screen display is not displayed unless the receiver’s HDMI OUT 1 terminal and the TV are connected with an HDMI cable. If the TV does not support HDMI, perform the operations and make the settings watching the display on the receiver’s front panel.

When the input is a 3D signal, OSD cannot be displayed.

Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned correctly (see

The Input Setup menu on page 41

).

These indicators do not light if playback is paused.

Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see

Choosing the input signal

on

page 55 ).

Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source component.

Check that the player is connected using a digital connection.

Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see

Choosing the input signal

on

page 55 ).

Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are converted to

PCM.

Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or DTS is selected.

The disc may not contain multi-channel material. Check the disc packaging for more on what audio tracks are recorded on the disc.

It does not light when the PCM signal or analog signal is input.

 

101

13

FAQ

Symptom

When playing a disc with the listening mode set to Auto Surround or

ALC, Pro Logic II or DTS Neo:X does not appear on the receiver.

During playback of DVD-Audio, the display shows PCM.

The power turns off automatically and some indicator flashes, or some indicator flashes and the power does not turn on.

Track names, etc., are not displayed in Chinese on the OSD when playing with the network function, a USB input, etc.

Remedy

Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal

on

page 55

).

If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround encoded), then this is not a malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details about the audio tracks available.

This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection. This is not a malfunction.

See the Power section ( page 98 ).

The OSD Language setting must be switched to Chinese. For details, see

Changing the

OSD display language (OSD Language) on page 42 .

Remote control

Symptom

Cannot be remote controlled.

Other components can’t be operated with the system remote.

Remedy

Set the remote control unit’s remote control mode so that it matches the setting on the

main unit (see Operating multiple receivers

on

page 76

).

Check whether the receiver’s remote control mode is properly set (see Remote Control

Mode Setup on page 93

).

Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see

Loading the batteries on page 9 ).

Be sure to operate within 7 m and a 30º angle of the remote sensor on the front panel

(see Operating range of remote control unit on page 10 ).

Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote control.

Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote sensor.

If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the preset codes.

The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset codes.

When commands from the remote control units of other devices are registered using the learning function, in some cases they may not be learned properly. In this case, register the commands again using the learning function (see

page 77

). If they still do not work, they may be in a special format that cannot be registered on this receiver’s remote control. Operate the device using another remote control.

102

HDMI

Symptom

The HDMI indicator blinks continuously.

Video/audio is not output or is interrupted.

The picture and sound output get cut off, or there is no output produced.

No picture.

No sound, or sound suddenly ceases.

Noisy or distorted picture.

HDCP ERROR shows in the display.

Remedy

Check all the points below.

This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCP-compatible. If they are not, please connect them using the component or composite video jacks.

Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with this receiver (even if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect using the component or composite video jacks between source and receiver.

If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.

If video images do not appear on your TV, try adjusting the resolution, Deep Color or other setting for your component.

While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate connection for audio output.

To output signals in Deep Color, use an HDMI cable (High Speed HDMI

®

/

TM connect this receiver to a component or TV with the Deep Color feature.

Cable) to

Influence from a TV whose power is set to standby may cause the picture or sound output to not be produced or to get cut off. In this case, press OUT P., and make sure to use an output other than the HDMI output to which that TV is connected.

Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options

on

page 69

).

To use the HDMI OUT 2 terminal in the main zone, set the MAIN/HDZONE

Output Setting to MAIN (

page 94

).

Check that the HDMI Audio setting is set to AMP ( Setting the Audio options on page 67 ).

If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.

If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate connection for the audio.

Check the audio output settings of the source component.

HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer time to be recognized. Due to this, interruption in the audio may occur when switching between audio formats or beginning playback.

Turning on/off the device connected to this unit’s HDMI OUT terminal during playback, or disconnecting/connecting the HDMI cable during playback, may cause noise or interrupted audio.

Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display device using the same type of connection (component or composite), then start playback again.

If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.

Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP. If it is not compatible with HDCP, reconnect the source device using a different type of connection

(component or composite). Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.

 

13

FAQ

Symptom

Synchronized operation not possible using Control with HDMI function.

When HDZONE is set to ON, the video resolution and number of audio channels for the main zone side changes.

HDZONE cannot be turned on.

When the input source for the main or HDZONE is switched or when the power of the respective zones is turned on and off, the audio or video of the HDMI output terminal that is not being operated is sometimes interrupted.

Such menus as the HOME MENU as well as the on-screen display are not displayed for HDMI OUT 1.

Cannot upscale to 4K or 1080p.

4K video is not output even though a

4K compliant TV is connected.

Remedy

Check the HDMI connections.

The cable may be damaged.

Select ON for the Control Mode with HDMI setting (see

HDMI Setup on page 63

).

Turn the TV’s power on before turning on this receiver’s power.

Set the TV side Control with HDMI setting to on (see TV’s operating instructions).

Connect the TV to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal and set the HDMI output to OUT 1. Then turn on first the TV’s power, then this receiver’s power.

This is due to the HDMI connection specifications; it is not a malfunction. When playing the same input in the main zone and HDZONE, video and audio signals that can be output in common for all the devices connected to the HDMI OUT 1, HDMI OUT 2 and

HDMI OUT 2 (HDZONE) terminals are set.

Set Output Setting at MAIN/HDZONE to HDZONE ( page 94 ).

This is because the HDMI devices need to recognize each other again. This is not a malfunction. If the picture is disturbed or not displayed, turn off the power of the devices in all the zones, then try again. Also try temporarily turning the Network Standby and

Standby Through settings OFF.

Press OUT P. and switch the HDMI OUT 1/2 setting.

Change V.CONV to ON. (

page 69

)

Change RES. ( page 69 )

When the network function or iPod/USB input is selected using HDZONE, upscaling cannot be performed. To perform upscaling, turn off HDZONE or set HDZONE to some

other input ( page 72 ).

When the MAIN/HDZONE setting is MAIN and the HDMI output setting is OUT 1+2 and when the MAIN/HDZONE setting is HDZONE and HDZONE is the same input as with the main zone, video is output with the lower resolution of the TV connected to HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2. When there is only one 4K compliant TV, connect it to HDMI OUT 1 and set the HDMI output setting to OUT 1 or turn off HDZONE so that video is only output to the 4K compliant TV.

MHL

Symptom

When playing an MHL-compatible device connected to the

HDMI 6/MHL terminal, the Standby

Through function does not work and the power turns off.

MHL-compatible device cannot be operated with the remote control.

MHL POW ERR is displayed on the display.

Remedy

The MHL device will not operate unless power is being supplied from this receiver. When this receiver is in the Standby Through mode, power cannot be supplied due to reduced power consumption. Because of this, the MHL device will not operate. This is not a malfunction.

Press MHL to set the remote control to the MHL control mode.

There is a problem with the power supply for the MHL device. After turning OFF the receiver, disconnect the MHL device, connect the MHL device again and then turn ON the power of the receiver.

If the error is displayed even though the above operation is repeated several times, there is a problem with the receiver or the MHL device. Disconnect the power cable and request repair.

Built-in AVNavigator

Symptom

AVNavigator does not interact well with the receiver.

Cause

The receiver’s power is not turned on.

The receiver or computer is not connected to the LAN.

The router’s power is off.

Network connections could be restricted due to the computer’s network settings, security settings, etc.

This is to avoid failure of the receiver due to a short-circuit between cables or from static electricity.

In the middle of

Wiring Navi, you are instructed to turn off the power of the unit and then connect other equipment or speakers.

When the Wiring Navi or

Interactive Operation Guide is launched, a warning about security protection appears on the browser.

AVNavigator screen is not displayed on the browser.

Receiver settings cannot be made from a browser.

This is because of the browser’s security function.

This receiver’s IP address has not been entered into the browser correctly.

JavaScript is disabled on the internet browser.

The browser is not compatible with

JavaScript.

Remedy

Turn the receiver’s power on. (Wait about 60 seconds after the power turns on for network functions to start.)

Connect a LAN cable to the receiver or computer (

page

33

).

Turn the router’s power on.

Check the computer’s network settings, security settings, etc.

Per the Wiring Navi instructions, turn OFF the power of the receiver. As long as the browser has not quit,

Wiring Navi resumes guidance upon turning ON the receiver.

This is not a problem. Perform the operation to authorize the blocked contents.

Check the receiver’s IP address and enter it correctly in the browser (

page 92

).

Enable JavaScript.

Use an internet browser that is compatible with JavaScript.

 

103

13

FAQ

USB interface

Symptom

The folders/files stored on a

USB memory device are not displayed.

A USB memory device is not recognized.

Cause

The folders/files are currently stored in a region other than the FAT (File

Allocation Table) region.

The number of levels in a folder is more than 9.

The audio files are copyrighted.

The USB memory device does not support the mass storage class specifications.

A USB hub is currently being used.

This receiver recognizes the USB memory device as a fraud.

A USB memory device is connected and displayed, but the audio files stored on the USB memory device cannot be played back.

The USB memory cannot be operated with the remote control.

Over Current shows in the display.

Some formats of USB memory devices, including FAT 12, NTFS, and

HFS, cannot be played back on this receiver.

The file format cannot be properly played back on this receiver.

Remedy

Store the folders/files in the FAT region.

Limit the maximum number of levels in a folder to 9 (

page

47 ).

Copyrighted audio files stored on a USB memory device cannot be played back (

page 47

).

Try using a USB memory device compatible with the mass storage class specifications. Note that there are cases where even the audio files stored on a USB memory device compatible with the mass storage class specifications are not played back on this receiver (

page 47 ).

Connect the USB memory device and switch on this

receiver ( page 34

).

This receiver does not support USB hubs (

page 47

).

Switch off and on again this receiver.

Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched off.

Change to an input other than iPod/USB, then set the input back to iPod/USB.

Check whether the format of your USB memory device is either FAT 16 or FAT 32. Note that the FAT 12, NTFS, and

HFS formats cannot be played back on this receiver (

page

47 ).

See the list of file formats that can be played back on this

receiver ( page 48

).

Press iPod USB to set the remote control to the iPod USB control mode.

There is a problem with the power supply for the USB memory. After turning off the receiver, disconnect the USB memory, connect the USB memory again and then turn on the power of the receiver.

If Over Current is displayed even though the above operation is repeated several times, there is a problem with the receiver or USB memory. Disconnect the power cable and request repair.

iPod

Symptom

iPod is not recognized.

iPod touch/iPhone is not recognized or otherwise does not operate properly.

iPod cannot be operated with the remote control.

The iPod’s operation may be unstable.

Cause

This receiver recognizes the iPod as a fraud.

Remedy

Switch off and on again this receiver.

Reconnect the iPod with the receiver switched off.

Change to an input other than iPod/USB, then set the input back to iPod/USB.

Try performing the operation below.

1. Press the sleep/sleep cancel button on the iPod touch/ iPhone simultaneously with the home button for at least 10 seconds to restart the device.

2. Turn this receiver’s power on.

3. Connect the iPod touch/iPhone to this receiver.

Press iPod USB to set the remote control to the iPod USB control mode.

 

Network

Symptom Cause

Cannot access the network. The LAN cable is not firmly connected.

Playback does not start while “Connecting...” continues to be displayed.

The network function cannot be operated with the remote control.

The PC or Internet radio is not properly operated.

The router is not switched on.

Internet security software is currently installed in the connected component.

The audio component on the network which has been switched off is switched on.

The component is currently disconnected from this receiver or the power supply.

The corresponding IP address is not properly set.

The IP address is being automatically configured.

Remedy

Firmly connect the LAN cable ( page 33 ).

Switch on the router.

There are cases where a component with Internet security software installed cannot be accessed.

Switch on the audio component on the network before switching on this receiver.

Check whether the component is properly connected to this receiver or the power supply.

Press NET to set the remote control to the network function control mode.

Switch on the built-in DHCP server function of your router, or set up the network manually according to your network

environment ( page 91 ).

The automatic configuration process takes time. Please wait.

104

13

FAQ

Symptom

The audio files stored on components on the network, such as a PC, cannot be played back.

Cannot access the component connected to the network.

Cause

Windows Media Player 11 or

Windows Media Player 12 is not currently installed on your PC.

Audio files recorded in MPEG-4

AAC or FLAC are being played back on Windows Media Player 11 or

Windows Media Player 12.

The component connected to the network is not properly operated.

The component connected to the network does not permit file sharing.

The folder stored on the component connected to the network has been deleted or damaged.

Network connections could be restricted due to the computer’s network settings, security settings, etc.

Supported file formats vary by server.

As such, files not supported by your server are not displayed on this unit.

The audio files are copyrighted.

The component connected to the network is not properly set.

There are no playable audio files on the component connected to the network.

Remedy

Install Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player

12 on your PC ( page 57 ).

Audio files recorded in MPEG-4 AAC or FLAC cannot be played back on Windows Media Player 11 or Windows

Media Player 12. Try using another server. Refer to the operation manual supplied with your server.

Check whether the component is affected by special circumstances or is in the sleep mode.

Try rebooting the component if necessary.

Try changing the settings for the component connected to the network.

Check the folder stored on the component connected to the network.

Check the computer’s network settings, security settings, etc.

For more information check with the manufacturer of your server.

DRM-protected audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.

If the client is automatically authorized, you need to enter the corresponding information again. Check whether the connection status is set to “Do not authorize”.

Check the audio files stored on the component connected to the network.

Symptom

Audio playback is undesirably stopped or disturbed.

Cannot access Windows

Media Player 11 or

Windows Media Player 12.

Cannot listen to Internet radio stations.

This unit cannot be selected from the Spotify application.

Cause

The audio file currently being played back was not recorded in a format playable on this receiver.

Remedy

Check whether the audio file was recorded in a format supported by this receiver.

Check whether the folder has been damaged or corrupted.

Note that there are cases where even the audio files listed as playable on this receiver cannot be played back or displayed (

page 61

).

Connect the LAN cable properly (

page 33

).

The LAN cable is currently disconnected.

There is heavy traffic on the network with the Internet being accessed on the same network.

When in the DMR mode, depending on the external controller being used, playback may be interrupted when a volume operation is performed from the controller.

There is a connection routed through a wireless LAN on the same network.

Use 100BASE-TX to access the components on the network.

In this case, adjust the volume from the receiver or remote control.

There may be a shortage of bandwidth on the 2.4 GHz band used by the wireless LAN. Make wired LAN connections not routed through a wireless LAN.

Install away from any devices emitting electromagnetic waves on the 2.4 GHz band (microwave ovens, game consoles, etc.). If this does not solve the problem, stop using other devices that emit electromagnetic waves.

Instead of logging onto the domain, log onto the local

machine ( page 58

).

In case of Windows Media Player

11: You are currently logged onto the domain through your PC with

Windows XP or Windows Vista installed.

In case of Windows Media Player

12: You are currently logged onto the domain through your PC with

Windows 7 or Windows 8 installed.

The firewall settings for components on the network are currently in operation.

You are currently disconnected from the Internet.

Check the firewall settings for components on the network.

The broadcasts from an Internet radio station are stopped or interrupted.

Check the connection settings for components on the network, and consult with your network service provider if necessary (

page 91

).

There are cases where you cannot listen to some Internet radio stations even when they are listed in the list of Inter-

net radio stations on this receiver ( page 58 ).

An Internet connection is required for both the mobile digital device and this unit.

Connect the mobile digital device by Wi-Fi to the wireless

LAN router of the same network as the one to which this unit is connected.

A Spotify Premium account (for a charge) must be registered on the Spotify application.

When this unit is in standby, it cannot be selected from the

Spotify application.

 

105

13

Symptom

The sound of the Spotify audio stream is not produced.

This unit’s volume does not increase when the volume slider in the Spotify application is raised.

Playback continues on this unit when the Spotify application is quit.

The Network functions cannot be operated with the buttons on the remote control.

When the DMR mode or

AirPlay is used from a computer, smartphone, etc., the sound is played in

ZONE 2.

Network connections cannot be made via the wireless LAN converter

(AS-WL300).

Cause

With an AV receiver that has the

System Setup’ d ‘Other Setup’ d

Play ZONE Setup’ option, the sound may be playing in another zone.

A volume upper limit is provided so that the volume will not inadvertently go up too much.

The Spotify audio stream continues from this unit, even when the Spotify application is quit.

The remote control is not currently set to the Network function mode.

Play ZONE Setup is set to ZONE 2.

Remedy

Check whether this unit is selected on the Spotify application.

Check that contents are playing on the Spotify application.

If the above does not solve the problem, turn this unit’s power off then back on.

If this is the case, set which zone the sound is to be played in at the play zone settings.

To further increase the volume, use the remote control.

When the iControlAV5 or built-in AVNavigator application is being used, you can use the application to increase the volume.

To operate again, relaunch the Spotify application.

Press NET to set the remote control to the Network func-

tion mode ( page 58 ).

Change Play ZONE Setup to MAIN (

page 95 ).

For details, see Wireless LAN on page 106 .

Wireless LAN

Network cannot be accessed via wireless LAN.

Wireless LAN converter’s power is not on. (Wireless LAN converter’s “Power”, “WPS” and “Wireless” indicators are not all lit.)

! Check that the USB cable connecting the wireless LAN converter to the receiver’s DC OUTPUT for

WIRELESS LAN terminal is properly connected.

WLAN POW ERR is displayed on the receiver’s display window.

! There is a problem with the wireless LAN converter’s power supply. Turn the receiver’s power off, then disconnect the USB cable, reconnect the USB cable and turn the receiver’s power back on.

with the receiver or the USB cable. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

The LAN cable is not firmly connected.

! Firmly connect the LAN cable (

page 35 ).

FAQ

Wireless LAN converter and base unit (wireless LAN router, etc.) are too far apart or there is an obstacle between them.

! Improve the wireless LAN environment by moving the wireless LAN converter and base unit closer together, etc.

There is a microwave oven or other device generating electromagnetic waves near the wireless LAN environment.

! Use the system in a place away from microwave ovens or others device generating electromagnetic waves.

! Avoid using devices generating electromagnetic waves as much as possible when using the system with the wireless LAN.

Multiple wireless LAN converters are connected to the wireless LAN router.

! When connecting multiple wireless LAN converters, their IP addresses must be changed.

Wireless LAN connections cannot be established between the wireless LAN converter and base unit (wireless

LAN router, etc.).

! The wireless LAN converter must be set in order to establish wireless LAN connections. For details, see the CD-ROM included with the wireless LAN converter.

The IP address settings of the receiver and wireless LAN converter do not match the settings of the wireless

LAN router, etc.

! Check the IP address settings of the receiver and wireless LAN converter (including the DHCP setting).

If the receiver’s DHCP setting is “ON”, turn the receiver’s power off, then turn the power back on.

Check that the IP addresses of the receiver and wireless LAN converter match the settings of the wireless

LAN router, etc.

If the receiver’s DHCP setting is “OFF”, set an IP address matching the network of the base unit (wireless

LAN router, etc.).

For example, if the wireless LAN router’s IP address is “192.168.1.1”, set the receiver’s IP address to

“192.168.1.XXX” (*1), the subnet mask to “255.255.255.0”, the gateway and DNS to “192.168.1.1”.

Next, set the wireless LAN converter’s IP address to “192.168.1.249” (*2).

(*1) Set the “XXX” in “192.168.1.XXX” to a number between 2 and 248 that is not assigned to other devices.

(*2) Set the “249” in “192.168.1.249” to a number between 2 and 249 that is not assigned to other devices.

 

Try making the wireless LAN converter’s advanced settings.

! The wireless LAN converter can be connected to a computer to make the advanced wireless LAN settings.

For details, see the CD-ROM included for the wireless LAN converter. Check the settings of the wireless

LAN router, etc., then change the settings of the wireless LAN converter.

Note, however, that making the advanced wireless LAN settings will not necessarily improve the wireless

LAN environment. Be careful when changing the settings.

The access point is set to conceal the SSID.

! In this case, the SSID may not be displayed on the access point list screen. If not, set the SSID, etc., by making the wireless LAN converter settings on the receiver manually.

The access point’s security settings use WEP 152-bit length code key or shared key authentication.

! The receiver does not support WEP 152-bit length code key or shared key authentication.

Network connections cannot be established even when the above measures are taken.

! Reset the wireless LAN converter. After this, redo the wireless LAN converter’s settings.

About resetting

1. Check that the wireless LAN converter’s power is on.

2. Press the wireless LAN converter’s reset button for at least 3 seconds.

3. Release the reset button.

When the wireless LAN converter is restarted, the resetting procedure is completed.

106

Additional information

Surround sound formats .............................................................................................................108

SABRE DAC

TM

................................................................................................................................108

About HDMI .................................................................................................................................108

HTC Connect .................................................................................................................................108

About iPod ...................................................................................................................................109

Windows 8 ...................................................................................................................................109

MHL ...............................................................................................................................................109

Software license notice ...............................................................................................................109

Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats .........................110

Speaker Setting Guide ................................................................................................................110

About messages displayed when using network functions .................................................... 111

Important information regarding the HDMI connection .........................................................112

Cleaning the unit .........................................................................................................................112

Pioneer Authorized Distributors ................................................................................................112

Glossary ........................................................................................................................................113

Features index..............................................................................................................................116

Specifications ...............................................................................................................................117

Preset code list .............................................................................................................................118

 

107

14

Additional information

Surround sound formats

Below is a brief description of the main surround sound formats you’ll find on BDs, DVDs, satellite, cable and terrestrial broadcasts, and video cassettes.

Dolby

The Dolby technologies are explained below. See http://www.dolby.com for more detailed information.

SABRE DAC

TM

SABRE DAC

TM

and the logo are trademarks of ESS Technology, Inc.

About HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is a digital transfer standard for receiving video and audio data with a single cable. It is an adaptation of DVI (Digital Visual Interface), a display connection technology, for use in home audio devices. This interface standard is for next-generation TVs providing High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection (HDCP).

 

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

DTS

The DTS technologies are explained below. See http://www.dts.com for more detailed information.

The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and other countries.

HTC Connect

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of

DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

HTC, HTC Connect and the HTC Connect logo are trademarks of HTC Corporation.

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the

Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS Neo:X | 7.1 is a trademark of DTS, Inc. ©

DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

108

14

Additional information

About iPod

AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain Lion or later, and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.

USB works with iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone, iPod touch

(1st through 5th generation) and iPod nano (3rd through 7th generation).

“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.

Apple, AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, iTunes, Safari, Bonjour, Mac, Mac OS and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

The AirPlay logo is a trademark of Apple Inc.

App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

Windows 8

This product is Windows 8.1 Compatible and Windows 8 Compatible.

Software license notice

About Apple Lossless Audio Codec

Copyright © 2011 Apple Inc. All rights reserved.

Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0

About FLAC

FLAC Decoder

Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009

Josh Coalson

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

! Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

! Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

! Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL

THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN

IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

 

About Spotify

The Spotify software is subject to third party licenses found here: www.spotify.com/connect/third-party-licenses

Windows

®

and the Windows logo are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies.

MHL

MHL, the MHL Logo, and Mobile High-Definition Link are trademarks or registered trademarks of MHL, LLC in the

United States and other countries.

109

14

Additional information

Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats

The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the Stream Direct mode (see

Using Stream Direct on page 54 ) you have selected.

Stereo (2 channel) signal formats

Input signal format

Surround Back speaker(s): Connected

Dolby Digital Surround

DTS Surround

Other stereo sources

Analog sources

PCM sources

DVD-A sources

SACD sources

Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected

Dolby Digital Surround

DTS Surround

Other stereo sources

Analog sources

PCM sources

DVD-A sources

SACD sources

Auto Surround / ALC /

DIRECT

Pro Logic IIx MOVIE

Neo:X CINEMA

Stereo playback

As above

As above

As above

As above

Pro Logic II MOVIE

Neo:X CINEMA

Stereo playback

As above

As above

As above

As above

PURE DIRECT

Pro Logic IIx MOVIE

Neo:X CINEMA

Stereo playback

ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)

Stereo playback

As above

As above

Pro Logic II MOVIE

Neo:X CINEMA

Stereo playback

ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)

Stereo playback

As above

As above

Multichannel signal formats

Input signal format

Surround Back speaker(s): Connected

Auto Surround / ALC

Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)

Dolby TrueHD EX (6.1 channel flagged)

DTS-HD Master Audio ES (6.1 channel flagged)

DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel flagged)

DTS sources (5.1 channel encoding)

DTS-HD sources

Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources

Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected

DVD-A sources/Multi-ch PCM

SACD sources (5.1 channel encoding)

Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources

Dolby Digital EX

Pro Logic IIx MOVIE

<a>

DTS-ES (Matrix)

DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)

Straight decoding

As above

As above

Straight decoding

As above

As above

a Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.

PURE DIRECT / DIRECT

Dolby Digital EX

Pro Logic IIx MOVIE

<a>

DTS-ES (Matrix)

DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)

Straight decoding

As above

As above

Straight decoding

As above

As above

Speaker Setting Guide

In order to achieve an even better surround effect, it is important to accurately position the speakers and make their volume and tone characteristics uniform so as to finely focus the multi-channel sound.

The three major elements in positioning the speakers are distance, angle and orientation (the direction in which the speakers are pointing).

Distance: The distance of all the speakers should be equal.

Angle: The speakers should be horizontally symmetrical.

Orientation: The orientation should be horizontally symmetrical.

In most homes, however, it is not possible to achieve this environment. For the distance, on this receiver it is possible to automatically correct the speaker distance electrically to a precision of 1 cm using the Full Auto MCACC

Setup function (

page 39 ).

Step 1: Speaker layout and distance adjustment

Use speaker stands or the like to make sure the speakers are steady, and leave at least 10 cm from the surrounding walls. Position the speakers attentively so that the speakers on the left and right are at equal angles from the listening position (center of the adjustments). (We recommend using cords, etc., when adjusting the layout.)

Ideally all the speakers should be equidistant from the listening position.

110

Note

If the speakers cannot be set at equal distances (on a circle), use the Auto MCACC Setup speaker distance correction and Fine Speaker Distance functions to make them equalize the distance artificially.

Step 2: Adjusting the speaker height

Adjust the heights (angles) of the different speakers.

Adjust so that the front speaker units reproducing mid- and high frequencies is roughly at the height of the ears.

If the center speaker cannot be set at the same height as the front speakers, adjust its angle of elevation to point it to the listening position.

Set surround speaker 1 so that it is not under the height of the ears.

Step 3: Adjusting the speaker orientation

If the left and right speakers are not pointing in the same direction, the tone will not be the same on the right and left, and as a result the sound field will not be reproduced properly. However, if all the speakers are pointed towards the listening position, the sound field will seem cramped. Testing by the Pioneer Multi-channel Research

Group has shown that a good sense of sound positioning can be achieved by pointing all the speakers towards an area 30 cm to 80 cm behind the listening position (between the surround speakers and the listening position).

However, the sense of sound positioning can differ according to the conditions in the room and the speakers being used. In smaller environments in particular (when the front speakers are close to the listening position), with this method the speakers will be pointed too inward. We suggest you use this example of installation as reference when trying out different installation methods.

Step 4: Positioning and adjusting the subwoofer

Placing the subwoofer between the center and front speakers makes even music sources sound more natural (if there is only one subwoofer, it doesn’t matter if it is placed on the left or right side). The low bass sound output from the subwoofer is not directional and there is no need to adjust the height. Normally the subwoofer is placed on the floor. Put it in a position at which it will not cancel out the bass sound output from the other speakers.

Also note that placing it near a wall may result in sympathetic vibrations with the building that could excessively amplify the bass sound.

 

14

Additional information

If the subwoofer must be installed near a wall, place it at an angle so that it is not parallel to the wall surface. This can help reduce any sympathetic vibrations, but depending on the shape of the room this could result in standing waves. However, even if standing waves are generated, their influence on the sound quality can be prevented

using the Auto MCACC’s standing wave control function ( page 85 ).

Step 5: Default settings with the Auto MCACC Setup (auto sound field correction) function

It is more effective to perform the Full Auto MCACC Setup (

page 39

above have been completed.

Note

The distance to the subwoofer may be slightly larger than the distance actually measured with a tape measure, etc. This is because this distance is corrected for electric delay, and is not a problem.

Positional relationship between speakers and monitor

Position of front speakers and monitor

The front speakers should be as equidistant as possible to the monitor.

About messages displayed when using network functions

Refer to the following information when you come up with a status message while operating the Network functions.

Status messages

Connection Down

File Format Error

Track Not Found

Server Error

Server Disconnected

Empty

License Error

Item Already Exists

Favorite List Full

Descriptions

The selected category or Internet radio station cannot be accessed.

Cannot be played back for some reasons.

The selected song has not been found anywhere on the network.

The selected server cannot be accessed.

The server has been disconnected.

There are no files stored in the selected folder.

The license for the contents to be played back is invalid.

This is displayed when the file you have attempted to register in the Favorites folder has already been registered.

This is displayed when you have attempted to register a file in the Favorites folder but the

Favorites folder is already full.

 

L R

45° to 60°

Position of center speaker and monitor

Since mostly dialogs are output from the center speaker, keeping the center speaker as close as possible to the screen makes the overall sound more natural. For TVs using Braun tubes, however, when installing the center speaker on the floor, adjust its angle of elevation to point it towards the listening position.

Installation on floor (Diagram as seen

from the side)

Monitor

! If the center speaker is not of the shielded type, install it away from the TV.

! When installing the center speaker on top of the monitor, place it facing slightly downwards towards the listening position.

111

14

Additional information

Important information regarding the HDMI connection

There are cases where you may not be able to route HDMI signals through this receiver (this depends on the HDMI-equipped component you are connecting-check with the manufacturer for HDMI compatibility information).

If you aren’t receiving HDMI signals properly through this receiver (from your component), please try one of the following configurations when connecting up.

Configuration A

Use component video cables to connect the video output of your HDMI-equipped component to the receiver’s component video input. The receiver can then convert the analog component video signal to a digital HDMI signal for transmission to the display. For this configuration, use the most convenient connection (digital is recommended) for sending audio to the receiver. See the operating instructions for more on audio connections.

Note

The picture quality will change slightly during conversion.

Configuration B

Connect your HDMI-equipped component directly to the display using an HDMI cable. Then use the most convenient connection (digital is recommended) for sending audio to the receiver. See the operating instructions for more on audio connections. Set the display volume to minimum when using this configuration.

Notes

! If your display only has one HDMI terminal, you can only receive HDMI video from the connected component.

! Depending on the component, audio output may be limited to the number of channels available from the connected display unit (for example audio output is reduced to 2 channels for a monitor with stereo audio limitations).

! If you want to switch the input function, you’ll have to switch functions on both the receiver and your display unit.

! Since the sound is muted on the display when using the HDMI connection, you must adjust the volume on the display every time you switch input functions.

Cleaning the unit

! Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and dirt.

! When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six times with water, and wrung out well, and then wipe again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or cleansers.

! Never use thinners, benzene, insecticide sprays or other chemicals on or near this unit, since these will corrode the surface.

Pioneer Authorized Distributors

REP. OF SOUTH AFRICA

AFRITRONICS

Edenburg Terraces, Block A, 348 Rivonia boulevard, Rivonia.

Johannesburg 2091

P.O. Box 148, Wendywood, 2144

TEL: 603 9900

THAILAND

PIONEER ELECTRONICS (THAILAND) CO.,

LTD.

FL. 17 KPN Tower.

719 Rama 9Rd.

Bangkapi, Huaykwang, Bangkok 10310,

TEL: 02-717-0777 FAX: 02-717-0700

HONG KONG

PIONEER (HK) LTD.

5/F., 909 Cheung Sha Wan Road,

Kowloon, Hong Kong

TEL: 2848-6488

U.A.E.

PIONEER GULF FZE

Lob 11-017, Jebel Ali Free Zone,

P.O. Box 61226, Jebel Ali, Dubai, U.A.E.

TEL: 971-4-881-5756

INDONESIA

P.T. ADAB ALAM ELECTRONIC

Jl. K.H. Zainul Arifin No. 13A Jakarta-Pusat

TEL: + (021) 6331924, 6331859, 6337665,

6337767

AUSTRALIA

PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY.

LTD.

Melbourne; 5 Arco Lane, Heatherton, Victoria, 3202

TEL: 1800 988 268

MALAYSIA

PIONEER TECHNOLOGY (M) SDN. BHD

16th Floor, Menara Uni. Asia

1008, Jalan Sultan Ismail, 50250 Kuala Lumpur.

TEL: 03 2697 2920

NEW ZEALAND

MONACO CORP. LTD.

10 Rothwell Ave., Albany. Auckland

P.O. Box 4399, Auckland 1

TEL: 94157444

PHILIPPINES

Zamony Venture Corporation

708 Apelo Cruz St. Malibay

P.O. Box 473, Pasay city

TEL: (02) 8520031

MEXICO

PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO,

S.A.DE C.V.

Blvd. Manuel Avila Camacho138 piso 10

Colonia Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,

D.F. 11000

TEL: 52-55-9178-4270

SINGAPORE

PIONEER ASIACENTRE PTE LTD. Domestic

Service Dept.

253, Alexandra Road #04-01 Singapore, 159936

TEL: 64727555

REP. OF PANAMA

PIONEER INTERNATIONAL LATIN AMERICA,

S.A.

Plaza Credicorp Bank, 14th Floor, Calle 50

No.120 Panama City 0816-01361 R.O.Panama

TEL: 507-300-3900

TAIWAN

PIONEER HIGH FIDELITY TAIWAN CO., LTD.

8F., No.407, Ruiguang Road, Neihu Dist., Taipei

City 11492, Taiwan

PTC service telephone number: (02) 2657-7366

 

112

14

Additional information

Glossary

Audio formats/Decoding

Dolby

The Dolby technologies are explained below. See http://www.dolby.com for more detailed information.

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding system widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD and digital broadcast soundtracks.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is the lossless encoding technology developed for high-definition optical discs in the upcoming era.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is the audio technology for all high-definition programming and media. It combines the efficiency to meet future broadcast demands with the power and flexibility to realize the full audio potential expected in the upcoming high-definition era.

Dolby Digital Surround EX

Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for EXtended) is an extension of Dolby Digital encoding whereby a surround back channel is matrixed into the surround left/right channels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel decoding, as well as for decoding using Dolby Digital EX.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system.

Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack, which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for enhanced surround listening with greater sound detail.

Dolby Pro Logic IIz

Adding a pair of speakers above the front left and right speakers adds expressiveness in the vertical direction to the previous horizontally-oriented sound field. The height channel strengthens the sound field’s sense of threedimensionality and air, producing presence and expansion.

DTS

The DTS technologies are explained below. See http://www.dts.com for more detailed information.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding system from DTS Inc. now widely used for DVD-Video, DVD-

Audio, 5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and video games.

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers master audio sources recorded in a professional studio to listeners without any loss of data, preserving audio quality.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

A high definition audio technology by which signals can be transferred over HDMI cables.

DTS-ES

DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a decoder that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources.

DTS Neo:X

DTS Neo:X can generate 11.1 channel surround sound from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV) and from 5.1 channel sources.

Decoding

A technology for converting digital signals that have been compressed upon recording by a digital signal processing circuit, etc., into the original signals. The term “decoding” (or “matrix decoding”) is also used for the technology which converts 2-channel sound sources into multiple channels or expands 5.1-channel signals into 6.1 or

7.1 channels.

 

Calibrating the sound field/Improving the sound quality

Phase Control

The Phase Control technology incorporated into this receiver’s design provides coherent sound reproduction through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound image at your listening position.

Virtual Speakers

Virtual playback of a maximum of 11.2 channels combining the actually installed speakers and the virtual speakers is possible. This makes for smoother connection between the sounds and an improved 3D feel.

Virtual Surround Back

When you’re not using surround back speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround back channel through your surround speakers. You can choose to listen to sources with no surround back channel information.

Virtual Height

When you’re not using front height speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual front height channel through your front speakers.

Virtual Wide

When you’re not using front wide speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual front wide channel through your front speakers.

Virtual Depth

When this mode is selected, the sound field expands virtually to behind the display, resulting in a sound field with the same depth as the 3D picture to achieve a better sense of presence.

Auto Sound Retriever

The Auto Sound Retriever feature employs DSP technology to restore sound pressure and smooth jagged artifacts left over after compression.

With some audio inputs, the Sound Retriever effect is automatically optimized based on the bitrate information of the contents that have been input to achieve high sound quality.

Sound Retriever Air

Sound Retriever Air compensates for reduced sound quality due to compression when sending Bluetooth signals.

PQLS

Jitterless high quality playback is possible by connecting a PQLS-compatible player with HDMI connections.

ALC (Auto Level Control)

In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this receiver equalizes playback sound levels.

Also, the low and high frequency sounds, dialogs, surround effects, etc., that are difficult to hear when the volume is low are adjusted to be optimal for the volume level. This mode is particularly optimum when listening at night.

Front Stage Surround Advance

With the Front Stage Surround Advance feature, you can enjoy seamless, natural surround sound effects using only the front speakers, without deteriorating the quality of the original sound.

MCACC

The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate surround sound setup, which includes the advanced features of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ.

113

14

Additional information

HDMI

Control with HDMI function

Synchronized operations below with a Control with HDMI-compatible Pioneer TV or Blu-ray Disc player are possible when the component is connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable.

! The receiver’s volume can be set and the sound can be muted using the TV’s remote control.

! The receiver’s input switches over automatically when the TV’s input is changed or a Control with HDMIcompatible component is played.

! The receiver’s power is also set to standby, when the TV’s power is set to standby.

ARC (Audio Return Channel)

When a TV supporting the HDMI ARC (Audio Return Channel) function is connected to the receiver, the sound of the TV can be input via the HDMI OUT terminal.

The sound of the TV can be input from the receiver’s HDMI OUT terminal, so connection with the TV can be completed with a single HDMI cable.

Network function

AirPlay

AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain Lion or later, and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.

For more information, see the Apple website (http://www.apple.com).

DLNA

The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a cross-industry organization of consumer electronics, computing industry and mobile device companies. Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing of digital media through a wired or wireless network in the home.

vTuner

vTuner is a paid online database service that allows you to listen to radio and TV broadcasts on the Internet. vTuner lists thousands of stations from over 100 different countries around the globe. For more detail about vTuner, visit the following website: http://www.radio-pioneer.com

“This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of NEMS and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from NEMS and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary.”

Apple Lossless (ALAC)

“ALAC” stands for Apple Lossless Audio Codec. This is a loseless type audio codec and is used for example for iTunes ® . It compresses non-compressed files (such as WAV and AIFF) to about one half the original size with no loss of sound quality.

FLAC

FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) is an audio format allows lossless codec. Audio is compressed in FLAC without any loss in quality. For more details about FLAC, visit the following website: http://flac.sourceforge.net/

Windows Media

Windows Media is a multimedia framework for media creation and distribution for Microsoft Windows. Windows

Media is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.

Use an application licensed by Microsoft Corporation to author, distribute, or play Windows Media formatted content. Using an application unauthorized by Microsoft Corporation is subject to malfunction.

Windows Media Player 11/Windows Media Player 12

Windows Media Player is software to deliver music, photos and movies from a Microsoft Windows computer to home stereo systems and TVs.

With this software, you can play back files stored on the PC through various devices wherever you like in your home.

This software can be downloaded from Microsoft’s website.

! Windows Media Player 11 (for Windows XP or Windows Vista)

! Windows Media Player 12 (for Windows 7 or Windows 8)

For more information check the official Microsoft website.

Router

A device for relaying data flowing on a network to another network. In homes, routers often also function as

DHCP servers. Products with built-in wireless LAN access points are called “wireless LAN routers”.

DHCP

Abbreviation of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol for automatically assigning such setting information as IP addresses within network connections. This offers convenience in that, when enabled, it allows network functions to be used simply by connecting the devices to the network.

Wireless LAN/Wi-Fi

“Wi-Fi” (Wireless Fidelity) is a trademark coined by the Wi-Fi Alliance trade association to increase recognition of wireless LAN standards. With the increase in the number of devices connected to computers in recent years,

Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with LAN cables by using wireless connection. As a way of reassuring users, products that have passed interoperability tests carry the logo

“Wi-Fi Certified” to indicate that compatibility is assured.

WPS

Abbreviation of Wi-Fi Protected Setup. A standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance industry group for a function allowing settings related to interconnection of WPS-compatible wireless LAN devices and encryption to be made with simple operations. There are a number of methods, including push-button configuration and PIN code configuration. This AV receiver supports both push-button configuration and PIN code configuration.

SSID

Abbreviation of Service Set IDentifier. A wireless LAN access point identifier. Can be set as desired using up to 32 characters of English letters and numbers.

 

Bluetooth function

Bluetooth wireless technology

A short-range wireless communications standard for digital devices. Information is exchanged between devices several meters to several tens of meters apart using radio waves. It uses radio waves on the 2.4 GHz band which does not require applications for licenses or usage registration for applications conducting wireless exchange of digital information at relatively low speeds, such as computer mouses and keyboards, mobile phones, smartphones, text and audio information for PDAs, etc.

Pairing

“Pairing” must be done before you start playback of Bluetooth wireless technology content using the Bluetooth

ADAPTER. Make sure to perform pairing the first time you operate the system or any time pairing data is cleared.

The pairing step is necessary to register the Bluetooth wireless technology device to enable Bluetooth communications. For more details, see also the operating instructions of your Bluetooth wireless technology device.

! Pairing is required when you first use the Bluetooth wireless technology device and Bluetooth ADAPTER.

! To enable Bluetooth communication, pairing should be done with both your system and Bluetooth wireless technology device.

114

14

Receiver function

Operation Mode

This receiver is equipped with a great number of functions and settings. The Operation Mode feature is provided for users who find it difficult to master all these functions and settings.

MHL

MHL (Mobile High-definition Link) is an interface standard for transmitting digital signals with mobile devices.

MHL can carry high quality multi-channel audio data and 3D/Full-HD video formats.

“This receiver incorporates MHL 2.”

Additional information

 

115

14

Features index

Operation Mode

See Operation Mode Setup

on

page 42 .

AVNavigator

See How to use the built-in AVNavigator on page 38

.

ECO MODE 1, 2

See Using the Advanced surround effects

on

page 54 .

HDZONE

See MULTI-ZONE setup

on

page 31

.

HTC Connect

See About HTC Connect on page 58

.

Play ZONE

See Play ZONE Setup on page 95

.

4K pass through/up scaling

See About HDMI on page 24

.

Full Auto MCACC

See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 39

.

Automatic MCACC (Expert)

See Automatic MCACC (Expert)

on

page 82 .

Manual MCACC setup

See Manual MCACC setup on page 84 .

PQLS

See Setting the PQLS function on page 64

.

Phase Control

See Better sound using Phase Control on page 55 .

Standing Wave

See Setting the Audio options on page 67

.

Phase Control Plus

See Setting the Audio options on page 67

.

Auto Sound Retriever

See Setting the Audio options on page 67

.

ALC (Auto Level Control)

See Auto playback on page 53

.

Front Stage Surround Advance

See Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes on page 53

.

Sound Retriever Air

See Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes on page 53

.

Dialog Enhancement

See Setting the Audio options on page 67

.

Internet radio

See Listening to Internet radio stations on page 58

.

vTuner

See Listening to Internet radio stations on page 58

.

116

DLNA

See About network playback on page 60 .

AirPlay

See Using AirPlay on iPod touch, iPhone, iPad, and iTunes on page 57 .

Wireless LAN

See Connecting to a wireless LAN

on

page 35

.

Playback High Resolution audio file

See About playable file formats on page 61

.

See Playing a USB device on page 47

.

Slideshow

See Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory device on page 47

.

Bluetooth ADAPTER

See Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment of Music on page 50

.

ARC (Audio Return Channel)

See HDMI Setup on page 63

.

Auto delay

See Setting the Audio options

on

page 67 .

Height Gain (Dolby Pro Logic llz Height option)

See Setting the Audio options

on

page 67 .

Virtual Surround Back

See Setting the Audio options

on

page 67 .

Virtual Height

See Setting the Audio options

on

page 67 .

Virtual Wide

See Setting the Audio options

on

page 67 .

Virtual Depth

See Setting the Audio options

on

page 67 .

Digital Video Converter

See Setting the Video options on page 69 .

Pure Cinema

See Setting the Video options on page 69 .

Progressive Motion

See Setting the Video options on page 69 .

Advanced Video Adjust

See Setting the Video options on page 69 .

Auto Power Down

See The Other Setup menu on page 92 .

Additional information

 

14

Additional information

Specifications

Amplifier section

Multi channel simultaneous power output (1 kHz, 1 %, 8 W)

7 ch total .............................................................................................................................................................560 W

Maximum power output (1 kHz, THD 10 %, 4 W, 1 ch Driven) ...........................................................250 W per channel

Rated power output (1 kHz, 4 W, 1 %, 1 ch Driven) ............................................................................200 W per channel

Rated power output (1 kHz, 6 W, 1 %, 1 ch Driven) ............................................................................160 W per channel

Total harmonic distortion ........................................................................................0.04 % (1 kHz, 100 W + 100 W, 8 W)

Guaranteed speaker impedance ..................................................................................................................... 4 W to 16 W

Audio Section

Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)

LINE .......................................................................................................................................................365 mV/47 kW

Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)

LINE .................................................................................................................................................................. 100 dB

Tuner Section

Frequency Range (FM) ....................................................................................................................87.5 MHz to 108 MHz

Antenna Input (FM) ................................................................................................................................ 75 W unbalanced

Frequency Range (AM)

9 kHz step ...................................................................................................................................531 kHz to 1 602 kHz

10 kHz step .................................................................................................................................530 kHz to 1 700 kHz

Antenna (AM) ............................................................................................................................ Loop antenna (balanced)

Video Section

Signal level

Composite Video .................................................................................................................................... 1 Vp-p (75 W)

Component Video .................................................................................... Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 W), PB/PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 W)

Corresponding maximum resolution

Component Video .................................................................................................................................1080p (1125p)

Digital In/Out Section

HDMI terminal ......................................................................................................................................... 19-pin (Not DVI)

HDMI output type .............................................................................................................................................. 5 V, 55 mA

HDMI input/MHL terminal ............................................................................................................................. 5 V, 900 mA

USB terminal ..........................................................................................................USB2.0 High Speed (Type A) 5 V, 1 A iPod terminal ............................................................................................................................................................... USB

ADAPTER PORT terminal ............................................................................................................................... 5 V, 100 mA

WIRELESS LAN ADAPTER terminal .............................................................................................................. 5 V, 600 mA

Integrated Control Section

Control (IR) terminal ....................................................................................................................ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)

IR signal .............................................................................................................................High Active (High Level: 2.0 V)

RS-232C cable type ........................................................................................................9-pin, cross type, female-female

Network Section

LAN terminal ...............................................................................................................................10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX

Miscellaneous

Power requirements ............................................................................................ AC 220 V to 230 V / 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz

Power consumption ..................................................................................................................................................290 W

In standby ............................................................................................................................................................0.1 W

In standby (HDMI control on) ............................................................................................................................0.3 W

In standby (Network standby on) .......................................................................................................................2.0 W

In standby (HDMI control on, Network standby on) .........................................................................................2.5 W

Dimensions ...................................................................................................... 435 mm (W) x 185 mm (H) x 441 mm (D)

Weight (without package) ...................................................................................................................................... 14.7 kg

Number of Furnished Parts

MCACC Setup microphone .............................................................................................................................................. 1

Remote control unit .......................................................................................................................................................... 1

AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries .................................................................................................................................. 2

AM loop antenna ............................................................................................................................................................... 1

FM wire antenna ............................................................................................................................................................... 1

Power cord

CD-ROM

Quick start guide

Safety Brochure

Notes

! These specifications are applicable when the power supply is 230 V.

! Specifications and the design are subject to possible modifications without notice, due to improvements.

! This product includes FontAvenue ®

fonts licensed by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of

NEC Corporation.

! iOS is a trademark on which Cisco holds the trademark right in the US and certain other countries.

! Microsoft, Windows, Windows Media and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

! Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.

! Corporation and product names mentioned herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective corporations.

 

117

14

Additional information

Preset code list

You should have no problem controlling a component if you find the manufacturer in this list, but please note that there are cases where codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using. There are also cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code.

Important

! We do not guarantee the operations of all the manufacturers and devices listed. Operation may not be possible even if a preset code is entered.

If you can’t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control, you can still teach the remote individual commands from another remote control (see

Programming signals from other remote controls

on

page 77

).

TV

Pioneer 0113, 0233, 0252,

0275, 0291, 0295, 0296, 0305

A.R. Systems 0155

Acme 0141

Acura 0142, 0154

ADC 0140

Admiral 0138, 0139, 0140,

0145, 0146

Adyson 0141, 0228, 0229

Agashi 0228, 0229

Agazi 0140

Aiko 0141, 0142, 0154, 0155,

0228, 0229

Aim 0155

Aiwa 0199

Akai 0142, 0143, 0149, 0152,

0154, 0155, 0228, 0229

Akiba 0143, 0155

Akura 0140, 0143, 0154,

0155

Alaron 0228

Alba 0125, 0141, 0142, 0143,

0147, 0150, 0152, 0154, 0155,

0190, 0193, 0203, 0228

Alcyon 0132

Allorgan 0229

Allstar 0149, 0155

AMOi 0224

Amplivision 0125, 0141,

0156, 0229

Amstrad 0140, 0142, 0143,

0154, 0155

Anam 0142

Anglo 0142, 0154

Anitech 0132, 0140, 0142,

0154, 0155

Ansonic 0125, 0133, 0142,

0144, 0154, 0155

Arcam 0228, 0229

Arcam Delta 0141

Aristona 0149, 0152, 0155

Arthur Martin 0156

ASA 0138, 0146

Asberg 0132, 0149, 0155

Astra 0142

Asuka 0140, 0141, 0143,

0228, 0229

Atlantic 0141, 0149, 0152,

0155, 0228

Atori 0142, 0154

Auchan 0156

Audiosonic 0125, 0141,

0142, 0143, 0149, 0152, 0155,

0229

AudioTon 0125, 0141, 0229

Ausind 0132

Autovox 0132, 0138, 0140,

0141, 0229

Awa 0228, 0229

Baird 0229

Bang & Olufsen 0138, 0230

Basic Line 0142, 0143, 0149,

0154, 0155, 0229

Bastide 0141, 0229

Baur 0152, 0155

Bazin 0229

Beko 0125, 0150, 0155, 0175

Benq 0219

Beon 0149, 0152, 0155

Best 0125

Bestar 0125, 0149, 0155

Binatone 0141, 0229

Blue Sky 0143, 0155

Blue Star 0151

Boots 0141, 0229

BPL 0151, 0155

Brandt 0148, 0153, 0157,

0159

Brinkmann 0155

Brionvega 0138, 0149, 0152,

0155

Britannia 0141, 0228, 0229

Bruns 0138

BTC 0143

Bush 0142, 0143, 0145, 0147,

0149, 0151, 0152, 0154, 0155,

0180, 0193, 0229

Capsonic 0140

Carena 0155

Carrefour 0147

Cascade 0142, 0154, 0155

Casio 0221

Cathay 0149, 0152, 0155

CCE 0229

Centurion 0149, 0152, 0155

Century 0138

CGE 0125, 0132

Cimline 0142, 0154

City 0142, 0154

Clarivox 0152

Clatronic 0125, 0132, 0140,

0141, 0142, 0143, 0149, 0150,

0154, 0155, 0229

CMS 0228

CMS Hightec 0229

Concorde 0142, 0154

Condor 0125, 0141, 0149,

0150, 0154, 0155, 0228

Contec 0141, 0142, 0147,

0154, 0228

Continental Edison 0148

Cosmel 0142, 0154

Crosley 0132, 0138

Crown 0125, 0132, 0142,

0149, 0150, 0152, 0154, 0155

CS Electronics 0141, 0143,

0228

CTC Clatronic 0144

Cybertron 0143

Daewoo 0128, 0141, 0142,

0149, 0154, 0155, 0169, 0179,

0206, 0228, 0229

Dainichi 0143, 0228

Dansai 0140, 0149, 0152,

0155, 0228, 0229

Dantax 0125, 0152

Dawa 0155

Daytron 0142, 0154

De Graaf 0145

Decca 0141, 0149, 0152,

0155, 0229

Denver 0213, 0218

Desmet 0149, 0152, 0155

Diamant 0155

Diamond 0228

Dixi 0142, 0149, 0152, 0154,

0155, 0229

DTS 0142, 0154

Dual 0141, 0155, 0229

Dual-Tec 0141, 0142

Dumont 0138, 0141, 0144,

0229

Dux 0152

Dynatron 0149, 0152, 0155

Elbe 0125, 0133, 0155, 0229

Elcit 0138

Electa 0151

ELECTRO TECH 0142

Elin 0141, 0149, 0152, 0154,

0155, 0228

Elite 0143, 0149, 0155

Elman 0144

Elta 0142, 0154, 0228

Emerson 0125, 0138, 0155

Epson 0216

Erres 0149, 0152, 0155

ESC 0229

Etron 0142

Eurofeel 0229, 0140

Euroline 0152

Euroman 0125, 0140, 0141,

0149, 0155, 0228, 0229

Europhon 0141, 0144, 0149,

0155, 0228, 0229

Expert 0156

Exquisit 0155

Fenner 0142, 0154

Ferguson 0148, 0152, 0153,

0157

Fidelity 0141, 0145, 0155,

0228

Filsai 0229

Finlandia 0145

Finlux 0132, 0138, 0141,

0144, 0149, 0152, 0155, 0229

Firstline 0141, 0142, 0149,

0154, 0155, 0228, 0229

Fisher 0125, 0138, 0141,

0147, 0150, 0229

Flint 0149, 0155

Formenti 0132, 0138, 0139,

0141, 0152, 0228

Formenti/Phoenix 0228

Fortress 0138, 0139

Fraba 0125, 0155

Friac 0125

Frontech 0140, 0142, 0145,

0146, 0154, 0229

Fujitsu 0229

Fujitsu General 0229

Funai 0140

Galaxi 0155, 0150

Galaxis 0125, 0155

GBC 0142, 0147, 0154

Geant Casino 0156

GEC 0141, 0146, 0149, 0152,

0155, 0229

Geloso 0142, 0145, 0154

General Technic 0142, 0154

Genexxa 0143, 0146, 0149,

0155

Giant 0229

GoldHand 0228

Goldline 0155

Goldstar 0125, 0141, 0142,

0145, 0149, 0152, 0154, 0155,

0228, 0229

Goodmans 0140, 0142,

0147, 0149, 0152, 0154, 0155,

0222, 0229

Gorenje 0125, 0150

GPM 0143

Graetz 0146

Granada 0132, 0141, 0145,

0147, 0149, 0152, 0155, 0156,

0229

Grandin 0142, 0143, 0151,

0152

Gronic 0229

Grundig 0124, 0125, 0132,

0155, 0162

Halifax 0140, 0141, 0228,

0229

Hampton 0141, 0228, 0229

Hanseatic 0125, 0133, 0141,

0142, 0147, 0149, 0152, 0154,

0155, 0229

Hantarex 0142, 0154, 0155

Hantor 0155

Harwood 0154, 0155

HCM 0140, 0141, 0142, 0151,

0154, 0155, 0229

Hema 0154, 0229

Higashi 0228

HiLine 0155

Hinari 0142, 0143, 0147,

0149, 0152, 0154, 0155

Hisawa 0143, 0151, 0156

Hitachi 0137, 0141, 0145,

0146, 0147, 0155, 0191, 0226,

0229

Hornyphon 0149, 0155

Hoshai 0143

Huanyu 0141, 0228

Hygashi 0141, 0228, 0229

Hyper 0141, 0142, 0154,

0228, 0229

Hypson 0140, 0141, 0149,

0151, 0152, 0155, 0156, 0229

Iberia 0155

ICE 0140, 0141, 0142, 0143,

0149, 0154, 0155, 0228, 0229

ICeS 0228

Imperial 0125, 0132, 0146,

0149, 0150, 0155

Indiana 0149, 0152, 0155

Ingelen 0146

Ingersol 0142, 0154

Inno Hit 0132, 0141, 0142,

0143, 0149, 0152, 0154, 0155,

0229

Innovation 0140, 0142

Interactive 0125

Interbuy 0142, 0154

Interfunk 0125, 0138, 0146,

0149, 0152, 0155

International 0228

Intervision 0125, 0140,

0141, 0144, 0155, 0229

Irradio 0132, 0142, 0143,

0149, 0152, 0154, 0155

Isukai 0143, 0155

ITC 0141, 0229

ITS 0143, 0149, 0151, 0155,

0228

ITT 0142, 0146

ITV 0142, 0152, 0155

JVC 0134, 0135, 0147, 0149,

0192

Kaisui 0141, 0142, 0143,

0151, 0154, 0155, 0228, 0229

Kamosonic 0141

Kamp 0141, 0228

Kapsch 0146

Karcher 0125, 0141, 0142,

0152, 0155

Kawasho 0228

Kendo 0125, 0144, 0145,

0155

KIC 0229

Kingsley 0141, 0228

Kneissel 0125, 0133, 0155

Kolster 0149, 0155

Konka 0143

Korpel 0149, 0152, 0155

Korting 0125, 0138

Kosmos 0155

Koyoda 0142

KTV 0141, 0229

Kyoto 0228, 0229

Lasat 0125

Lenco 0142, 0154

Lenoir 0141, 0142, 0154

Leyco 0140, 0149, 0152, 0155

LG 0125, 0136, 0141, 0142,

0145, 0149, 0152, 0154, 0155,

0186, 0189, 0196, 0220, 0228,

0229

LG/GoldStar 0129

Liesenk 0152

Liesenkotter 0155

Life 0140, 0142

Lifetec 0140, 0142, 0154,

0155

Lloyds 0154

Loewe 0125, 0133, 0155,

0166, 0167

Loewe Opta 0138, 0149,

0152

Luma 0145, 0152, 0154, 0155

Lumatron 0145, 0149, 0152,

0155, 0229

Lux May 0149

Luxor 0141, 0145, 0229

M Electronic 0141, 0142,

0146, 0148, 0149, 0152

Magnadyne 0138, 0144,

0152

Magnafon 0132, 0141, 0144,

0228

Magnum 0140, 0142

Mandor 0140

Manesth 0140, 0141, 0149,

0152, 0155, 0229

Marantz 0149, 0152, 0155

Marelli 0138

Mark 0149, 0152, 0154, 0155,

0228, 0229

Masuda 0229

Matsui 0141, 0142, 0145,

0147, 0149, 0152, 0154, 0155,

0229

Mediator 0149, 0152, 0155

Medion 0140, 0142, 0155

M-Electronic 0154, 0155,

0228, 0229

Melvox 0156

Memorex 0142, 0154

Memphis 0142, 0154

Mercury 0154, 0155

Metz 0138, 0299, 0300, 0301,

0302

Micromaxx 0140, 0142

Microstar 0140, 0142

Minerva 0132

Minoka 0149, 0155

Mitsubishi 0138, 0147, 0149,

0155, 0200

Mivar 0125, 0132, 0133,

0141, 0228, 0229

Motion 0132

MTC 0125, 0228

Multi System 0152

Multitech 0125, 0141, 0142,

0144, 0145, 0147, 0152, 0154,

0155, 0228, 0229

Murphy 0141, 0228

 

118

14

Additional information

Naonis 0145

NEC 0147, 0229

Neckermann 0125, 0138,

0141, 0145, 0149, 0150, 0152,

0155, 0229

NEI 0149, 0152, 0155

Neufunk 0154, 0155

New Tech 0142, 0149, 0154,

0155, 0229

New World 0143

Nicamagic 0141, 0228

Nikkai 0140, 0141, 0143,

0149, 0152, 0154, 0155, 0228,

0229

Nobliko 0132, 0141, 0144,

0228

Nokia 0146

Nordic 0229

Nordmende 0138, 0146,

0148, 0149

Nordvision 0152

Novatronic 0155

Oceanic 0146, 0156

Okano 0125, 0150, 0155

ONCEAS 0141

Opera 0155

Orbit 0149, 0155

Orion 0142, 0149, 0152,

0154, 0155, 0194

Orline 0155

Osaki 0140, 0141, 0143,

0155, 0229

Oso 0143

Otto Versand 0139, 0141,

0147, 0149, 0151, 0152, 0155,

0229

Pael 0141, 0228

Palladium 0125, 0141, 0150,

0155, 0229

Palsonic 0229

Panama 0140, 0141, 0142,

0154, 0155, 0228, 0229

Panasonic 0123, 0146, 0155,

0158, 0164, 0214, 0217

Panavision 0155

Pathe Cinema 0125, 0133,

0141, 0156, 0228

Pausa 0142, 0154

Perdio 0155, 0228

Perfekt 0155

Philco 0125, 0132, 0138,

0155

Philharmonic 0141, 0229

Philips 0115, 0117, 0138,

0141, 0149, 0152, 0155, 0160,

0163, 0165, 0170, 0171, 0173,

0174, 0182, 0183, 0195, 0196,

0202, 0205, 0212, 0215

Phoenix 0125, 0138, 0149,

0152, 0155, 0228

Phonola 0138, 0149, 0152,

0155, 0228

Plantron 0140, 0149, 0154,

0155

Playsonic 0229

Poppy 0142, 0154

Prandoni-Prince 0132, 0145

Precision 0141, 0229

Prima 0142, 0146, 0154

Profex 0142, 0154

Profi-Tronic 0149, 0155

Proline 0149, 0155

Prosonic 0125, 0141, 0152,

0155, 0228, 0229, 0232

Protech 0140, 0141, 0142,

0144, 0149, 0152, 0229

Provision 0152, 0155

Pye 0149, 0152, 0155, 0198

Pymi 0142, 0154

Quandra Vision 0156

Quelle 0140, 0141, 0149,

0152, 0155, 0229

Questa 0147

Radialva 0155

Radio Shack 0155

Radiola 0149, 0152, 0155,

0229

Radiomarelli 0138, 0155

Radiotone 0125, 0149, 0154,

0155

Rank 0147

Recor 0155

Redstar 0155

Reflex 0155

Revox 0125, 0149, 0152,

0155

Rex 0140, 0145, 0146

RFT 0125, 0133, 0138

Rhapsody 0228

R-Line 0149, 0152, 0155

Roadstar 0140, 0142, 0143,

0154

Robotron 0138

Rowa 0228, 0229

Royal Lux 0125

RTF 0138

Saba 0138, 0146, 0148, 0153,

0157, 0159

Saisho 0140, 0141, 0142,

0154, 0229

Salora 0145, 0146

Sambers 0132, 0144

Samsung 0119, 0120, 0125,

0140, 0141, 0142, 0149, 0150,

0152, 0154, 0155, 0177, 0178,

0181, 0204, 0208, 0228, 0229

Sandra 0141, 0228, 0229

Sansui 0149, 0155

Sanyo 0125, 0133, 0141,

0147, 0154, 0187, 0228, 0229

SBR 0152, 0155

SCHAUB LORENTZ 0146

Schneider 0141, 0143, 0149,

0152, 0155, 0190, 0229

SEG 0140, 0141, 0144, 0147,

0152, 0154, 0155, 0190, 0228,

0229

SEI 0155

SEI-Sinudyne 0138, 0144,

0146

Seleco 0145, 0146, 0147

Sencora 0142, 0154

Sentra 0154

Serino 0228

Sharp 0130, 0131, 0139,

0147, 0184, 0207

Siarem 0138, 0144, 0155

Sierra 0149, 0155

Siesta 0125

Silva 0228

Silver 0147

Singer 0138, 0144, 0156

Sinudyne 0138, 0144, 0152,

0155

Skantic 0146

Skyworth 0307

Solavox 0146

Sonitron 0125, 0229

Sonoko 0140, 0141, 0142,

0149, 0152, 0154, 0155, 0229

Sonolor 0146, 0156

Sontec 0125, 0149, 0152,

0155

Sony 0116, 0118, 0142, 0147,

0161, 0168, 0172, 0185, 0188,

0197, 0201, 0211, 0225, 0227

Sound & Vision 0143, 0144

Soundwave 0149, 0152,

0155

Standard 0141, 0142, 0143,

0149, 0154, 0155, 0229

Starlight 0152

Starlite 0154, 0155

Stenway 0151

Stern 0145, 0146

Strato 0154, 0155

Stylandia 0229

Sunkai 0142

Sunstar 0154, 0155

Sunwood 0142, 0149, 0154,

0155

Superla 0141, 0228, 0229

SuperTech 0154, 0155, 0228

Supra 0142, 0154

Susumu 0143

Sutron 0142, 0154

Sydney 0141, 0228, 0229

Sysline 0152

Sytong 0228

Tandy 0139, 0141, 0143,

0146, 0229

Tashiko 0144, 0145, 0147,

0228, 0229

Tatung 0141, 0149, 0152,

0155, 0229

TCL 0308

TCM 0140, 0142

Teac 0155, 0229

Tec 0141, 0142, 0154, 0229

TEDELEX 0229

Teleavia 0148

Telecor 0155, 0229

Telefunken 0148, 0149,

0155, 0157

Telegazi 0155

Telemeister 0155

Telesonic 0155

Telestar 0155

Teletech 0142, 0152, 0154,

0155

Teleton 0141, 0229

Televideon 0228

Televiso 0156

Tensai 0142, 0143, 0149,

0154, 0155, 0229

Tesmet 0149

Tevion 0140, 0142

Texet 0141, 0154, 0228, 0229

Thomson 0121, 0122, 0141,

0148, 0149, 0153, 0155, 0157,

0159, 0210

Thorn 0152, 0155

Tokai 0149, 0155, 0229

Tokyo 0141, 0228

Tomashi 0151

Toshiba 0126, 0127, 0147,

0176, 0209, 0229

Towada 0146, 0229

Trakton 0229

Trans Continens 0155, 0229

119

Transtec 0228

Trident 0229

Triumph 0155

Vestel 0145, 0146, 0149,

0150, 0152, 0155, 0229

Vexa 0142, 0152, 0154, 0155

Victor 0147, 0149

VIDEOLOGIC 0228

Videologique 0141, 0143,

0228, 0229

VideoSystem 0149, 0155

Videotechnic 0228, 0229

Viewsonic 0223

Visiola 0141, 0228

Vision 0149, 0155, 0229

Vortec 0149, 0152, 0155

Voxson 0132, 0138, 0145,

0146, 0149, 0155

Waltham 0141, 0155, 0229

Watson 0149, 0152, 0155

DVD

Watt Radio 0141, 0144,

0228

Wega 0138, 0147, 0155

Wegavox 0154

Weltblick 0149, 0152, 0155,

0229

White Westinghouse 0141,

0144, 0152, 0155, 0228

Xrypton 0155

Yamishi 0155, 0229

Yokan 0155

Yoko 0125, 0140, 0141, 0142,

0143, 0149, 0152, 0154, 0155,

0228, 0229

Yorx 0143

Zanussi 0145, 0229

 

If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations with the preset

codes for the BD, DVR (BDR, HDR).

Pioneer 2014

AEG 2188

Aiwa 2149

Akai 2096

Akura 2186

Alba 2122, 2133, 2143

Amitech 2188

AMW 2189

Awa 2189

Bang & Olufsen 2191

Bellagio 2189

Best Buy 2185

Brainwave 2188

Brandt 2112, 2139

Bush 2122, 2143, 2177, 2184

Cambridge Audio 2180

CAT 2182, 2183

Centrum 2183

CGV 2180, 2188

Cinetec 2189

Clatronic 2184

Coby 2190

Conia 2177

Continental Edison 2189

Crown 2188

C-Tech 2181

CyberHome 2103, 2132

Daenyx 2189

Daewoo 2130, 2154, 2188,

2189

Daewoo International

2189

Dalton 2187

Dansai 2179, 2188

Daytek 2105, 2128, 2189

Dayton 2189

DEC 2184

Decca 2188

Denon 2161, 2163

Denver 2164, 2184, 2186,

2190

Denzel 2178

Diamond 2180, 2181

DK Digital 2129

Dmtech 2095

Dual 2178

DVX 2181

Easy Home 2185

Eclipse 2180

Electrohome 2188

Elin 2188

Elta 2142, 2188

Enzer 2178

Finlux 2180, 2188

Gericom 2145

Global Solutions 2181

Global Sphere 2181

Goodmans 2122, 2165, 2184

Graetz 2178

Grundig 2148

Grunkel 2188

H&B 2184

Haaz 2180, 2181

HiMAX 2185

Hitachi 2110, 2178, 2185

Innovation 2097

JVC 2119, 2136, 2152

Kansai 2190

Kennex 2188

Kenwood 2146

KeyPlug 2188

Kiiro 2188

Kingavon 2184

Kiss 2178

Koda 2184

KXD 2185

Lawson 2181

Lecson 2179

Lenco 2184, 2188

LG 2111, 2115, 2135, 2138,

2160, 2171

Life 2097

Lifetec 2097

Limit 2181

Loewe 2151

LogicLab 2181

Magnavox 2184

Majestic 2190

Marantz 2157

Marquant 2188

Matsui 2139

Mecotek 2188

Medion 2097

MiCO 2180

Micromaxx 2097

Microstar 2097

Minoka 2188

Mizuda 2184, 2185

Monyka 2178

Mustek 2101

Mx Onda 2180

Naiko 2188

Neufunk 2178

Nevir 2188

NU-TEC 2177

Onkyo 2167

Optim 2179

Optimus 2099

Orava 2184

Orbit 2189

Orion 2156

P&B 2184

Pacific 2181

Panasonic 2113, 2114, 2121,

2127, 2131, 2170

Philips 2100, 2106, 2117,

2118, 2126, 2134, 2157

Pointer 2188

Portland 2188

Powerpoint 2189

Prosonic 2190

Provision 2184

Raite 2178

RedStar 2186, 2188, 2190

Reoc 2181

Roadstar 2116, 2184

Ronin 2189

Rowa 2177

Rownsonic 2183

Saba 2112, 2139

Sabaki 2181

Saivod 2188

Samsung 2110, 2137, 2158,

2173, 2176

Sansui 2180, 2181, 2188

Sanyo 2140, 2166

ScanMagic 2101

Schaub Lorenz 2188

Schneider 2095

Scientific Labs 2181

Scott 2120, 2187

SEG 2116, 2178, 2181, 2189

Sharp 2097, 2141, 2174

Sigmatek 2185

Silva 2186

Singer 2180, 2181

Skymaster 2153, 2181

Skyworth 2186

Slim Art 2188

SM Electronic 2181

Sony 2104, 2108, 2123, 2124,

2125, 2150, 2175

Soundmaster 2181

Soundmax 2181

Spectra 2189

Standard 2181

14

Additional information

Star Cluster 2181

Starmedia 2184

Sunkai 2188

Supervision 2181

Synn 2181

Tatung 2130, 2188

TCM 2097

Teac 2162, 2177, 2181

BD

DVR (BDR, HDR)

Tec 2186

Technika 2188

Telefunken 2183

Tensai 2188

Tevion 2097, 2181, 2187

Thomson 2098, 2112, 2155,

2159

Tokai 2178, 2186

Toshiba 2102, 2156, 2168,

2169, 2172

TRANScontinents 2189

Trio 2188

TruVision 2185

Wharfedale 2180, 2181

Xbox 2098

Xlogic 2181, 2188

If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations with the preset

codes for the DVD, BD.

Pioneer 2078, 2099, 2107,

2109, 2144, 2157, 2193, 2194,

2195, 2196, 2258, 2259, 2260,

2261, 2264, 2265, 2266, 2270

Panasonic 2263, 2269

Sharp 2267, 2275

Sony 2268, 2271, 2272, 2273,

2276

Toshiba 2274

VCR

Pioneer 1053, 1108

Adyson 1050

Aiwa 1033, 1034, 1035

Akai 1034

Akiba 1040, 1050

Akura 1034, 1040, 1050

Alba 1035, 1036, 1037, 1040,

1050, 1051

Ambassador 1037

Amstrad 1033, 1050, 1051

Anitech 1040, 1050

ASA 1038, 1039

Asuka 1033, 1038, 1039,

1040, 1050

Audiosonic 1051

Baird 1033, 1034, 1036, 1051

Bang & Olufsen 1052

Basic Line 1035, 1036, 1037,

1040, 1050, 1051

Baur 1039

Bestar 1036, 1037, 1051

Black Panther Line 1036,

1051

Blaupunkt 1039

Bondstec 1037, 1050

Bush 1035, 1036, 1040, 1050,

1051

Cathay 1051

Catron 1037

CGE 1033, 1034

Cimline 1035, 1040, 1050

Clatronic 1037, 1050

Condor 1036, 1037, 1051

Crown 1036, 1037, 1040,

1050, 1051

Daewoo 1036, 1037, 1051

Dansai 1040, 1050, 1051

Dantax 1035

Daytron 1036, 1051

De Graaf 1039

Decca 1033, 1034, 1039

Denko 1050

Dual 1034, 1051, 1060

Dumont 1033, 1039

Elbe 1051

Elcatech 1050

Elsay 1050

Elta 1040, 1050, 1051

Emerson 1050

ESC 1036, 1051

Etzuko 1040, 1050

Ferguson 1034

Fidelity 1033, 1050

Finlandia 1039

Finlux 1033, 1034, 1039

Firstline 1035, 1038, 1040,

1050

Flint 1035

Formenti/Phoenix 1039

Frontech 1037

Fujitsu 1033

Funai 1033

Galaxy 1033

GBC 1037, 1040

GEC 1039

Geloso 1040

General 1037

General Technic 1035

GoldHand 1040, 1050

XMS 2188

Yamada 2189

Yamaha 2106

Yamakawa 2178, 2189

Yukai 2101, 2147

If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations with the preset

codes for the DVD, DVR (BDR, HDR).

Pioneer 2034, 2192, 2255,

2258, 2259, 2260, 2281

Denon 2310, 2311, 2312

Hitachi 2307, 2308, 2309

JVC 2290, 2291, 2293, 2294,

2295, 2296

LG 2286, 2287

Marantz 2302, 2303

Mitsubishi 2300, 2301

Onkyo 2289

Panasonic 2277, 2278, 2279

Philips 2280

Samsung 2282

Sharp 2304, 2305, 2306

Sony 2283, 2284, 2285, 2292

Toshiba 2288, 2262

Yamaha 2297, 2298, 2299

Goldstar 1033, 1048

Goodmans 1033, 1036,

1037, 1038, 1040, 1050, 1051

Graetz 1034

Granada 1039

Grandin 1033, 1036, 1037,

1038, 1040, 1050, 1051

Grundig 1039, 1040

Hanseatic 1038, 1039, 1051

Harwood 1050

HCM 1040, 1050

Hinari 1035, 1040, 1050,

1051

Hisawa 1035

Hitachi 1033, 1034, 1039,

1045

Hypson 1035, 1040, 1050,

1051

Impego 1037

Imperial 1033

Inno Hit 1036, 1037, 1039,

1040, 1050, 1051

Innovation 1035

120

Interbuy 1038, 1050

Interfunk 1039

Intervision 1033, 1051

Irradio 1038, 1040, 1050

ITT 1034

ITV 1036, 1038, 1051

JVC 1034, 1046

Kaisui 1040, 1050

Karcher 1039

Kendo 1035, 1036, 1037,

1050

Korpel 1040, 1050

Kyoto 1050

Lenco 1036

Leyco 1040, 1050

LG 1033, 1038, 1049

Lifetec 1035

Loewe Opta 1038, 1039

Logik 1040, 1050

Lumatron 1036, 1051

Luxor 1050

M Electronic 1033

Manesth 1040, 1050

Marantz 1039

Mark 1051

Matsui 1035, 1038

Matsushita 1033, 1039

Mediator 1039

Medion 1035

Memorex 1033, 1038

Memphis 1040, 1050

Micromaxx 1035

Microstar 1035

Migros 1033

CD

Pioneer 5000, 5011, 5062,

5063, 5064, 5067, 5068, 5070,

5071, 5072, 5073, 5074, 5075

AKAI 5043

Asuka 5045

Denon 5019

Fisher 5048

Goldstar 5040

Hitachi 5042

Kenwood 5020, 5021, 5031

Luxman 5049

Marantz 5033

Onkyo 5017, 5018, 5030,

5050

Multitech 1033, 1037, 1039,

1040, 1050

Murphy 1033

NEC 1034

Neckermann 1034, 1039

NEI 1039

Nesco 1040, 1050

Nikkai 1037, 1050, 1051

Nokia 1034, 1051

Nordmende 1034

Oceanic 1033, 1034

Okano 1035, 1050, 1051

Orion 1035

Orson 1033

Osaki 1033, 1038, 1040, 1050

Otto Versand 1039

Palladium 1034, 1038, 1040,

1050

Panasonic 1043

Pathe Marconi 1034

Perdio 1033

Philco 1050

Philips 1039, 1045, 1052

Phonola 1039

Portland 1036, 1037, 1051

Prinz 1033

Profex 1040

Proline 1033

Prosonic 1035, 1051

Pye 1039

Quelle 1033, 1039

Radialva 1050

Radiola 1039

Rex 1034

RFT 1037, 1039, 1050

Roadstar 1036, 1038, 1040,

1050, 1051

Royal 1050

Saba 1034

Saisho 1035, 1040

Samsung 1041

Samurai 1037, 1050

Sansui 1034

Saville 1051

SBR 1039

Schaub Lorenz 1033, 1034

Schneider 1033, 1035, 1036,

1037, 1038, 1039, 1040, 1050,

1051

SEG 1040, 1050, 1051

SEI-Sinudyne 1039

Seleco 1034

Sentra 1037, 1050

Sentron 1040, 1050

Sharp 1042

Shintom 1040, 1050

Shivaki 1038

Siemens 1038

Silva 1038

Silver 1051

Sinudyne 1039

Solavox 1037

Sonneclair 1050

Sonoko 1036, 1051

Sontec 1038

Sony 1044

Standard 1036, 1051

Stern 1051

Sunkai 1035

Sunstar 1033

Suntronic 1033

Sunwood 1040, 1050

Symphonic 1050

Taisho 1035

Tandberg 1051

Tashiko 1033

Tatung 1033, 1034, 1039

TCM 1035

Teac 1051

Tec 1037, 1050, 1051

Teleavia 1034

Telefunken 1034

Teletech 1050, 1051

Tenosal 1040, 1050

Tensai 1033, 1038, 1040,

1050

Tevion 1035

Thomson 1034, 1048

Thorn 1034

Tokai 1038, 1040, 1050

Tonsai 1040

Toshiba 1034, 1039, 1047

Towada 1040, 1050

Towika 1040, 1050

TVA 1037

Uher 1038

Ultravox 1051

United Quick Star 1036,

1051

Universum 1033, 1038, 1039

Videon 1035

Weltblick 1038

Yamishi 1040, 1050

Yokan 1040, 1050

Yoko 1037, 1038, 1040, 1050

 

Panasonic 5036

Philips 5022, 5032, 5044

RCA 5013, 5029

Roadstar 5052

Sharp 5051

Sony 5012, 5023, 5026, 5027,

5028, 5039

TEAC 5015, 5016, 5034, 5035,

5037

Technics 5041

Victor 5014

Yamaha 5024, 5025, 5038,

5046, 5047

14

Additional information

Satellite Set Top Box

Pioneer 6220, 6219, 6204

@sat 6251

@Sky 6238

ABsat 6180

Acoustic Solutions 6217

ADB 6174

Akai 6214

Akura 6228

Alba 6176, 6200, 6180, 6217

Allsat 6214

Alltech 6180

Allvision 6252, 6238, 6199

Amitronica 6180

Ampere 6256, 6261

Amstrad 6202, 6243, 6256,

6261, 6236, 6180

Anglo 6180

Ankaro 6180

Ansonic 6245

Anttron 6200

Apollo 6176

Apro 6232

Arcon 6192

Arcus 6193

Armstrong 6214

Arnion 6251

ASA 6230

Asat 6214

ASCI 6213, 6238

ASLF 6180

AssCom 6220

Astra 6255, 6180

Astratec 6268, 6269

Astrell 6202

Astro 6177, 6236, 6255,

6200, 6246, 6215, 6222, 6243

Atlanta 6245

Atsat 6251

AtSky 6238

Audioline 6232

Audioton 6200

Austar 6174

Avalon 6261

Axil 6244, 6186, 6245

Axis 6267

Axitronic 6228

B.net 6232

B@ytronic 6230, 6199

Balmet 6186

Beko 6176

Belson 6245

Big Sat 6186

Black Diamond 6217

Blaupunkt 6177

Blue Sky 6180

Boca 6256, 6180, 6252, 6185,

6257, 6237, 6187, 6188

Bodner & Mann 6194

Boshmann 6244, 6247

Boston 6227

Brainwave 6232, 6231

British Sky Broadcasting

6210

Broco 6180

BskyB 6210

BT 6195

Bubu Sat 6180

Bush 6254, 6217, 6264, 6228,

6190, 6232, 6268, 6201, 6265,

6182

Cambridge 6236

Canal Digital 6220

Canal Satellite 6220, 6219,

6278, 6277

Canal+ 6220, 6277

CGV 6244, 6183

Cherokee 6194

Chess 6213, 6180, 6238, 6228

CityCom 6229, 6255, 6179,

6192, 6241, 6252

Clark 6200

Classic 6232

Clatronic 6244

Clayton 6228

Clemens Kamphus 6261

Cobra 6261

Colombia 6256

Columbia 6256

Comag 6256, 6252, 6185,

6199, 6244, 6257, 6237, 6189,

6187, 6188

Comsat 6244

Condor 6255, 6253

Connexions 6261

Conrad 6256, 6236, 6207,

6255

Coship 6186, 6232

Crown 6217

Cryptovision 6176

CS 6247

Cyfrowy Polsat 6220

Cyrus 6214

D-box 6275

Daewoo 6267, 6180, 6195,

6268, 6182

Dantax 6228

Deltasat 6192

Denver 6245

Digatron 6231

Digenius 6229, 6226

Digiality 6255, 6238

Digifusion 6268, 6269

Digihome 6217, 6265, 6218

DigiLogic 6217

DigiQuest 6251, 6186, 6247

DigiSat 6252

Digisky 6186

Digital 6187

Digital Vision 6269

DigitalBox 6222, 6247

Dijam 6195

DirecTV 6263

Discovery 6194

Distratel 6202, 6250

DMT 6192

DNT 6214, 6261

Doro 6232

Dual 6252

Durabrand 6217, 6218

Echolink 6185

Echostar 6220, 6233, 6261,

6176, 6180, 6181, 6239

Edision 6247

Einhell 6256, 6236, 6180

Elap 6180, 6244, 6183

Elbe 6245

Elless 6230

Elsat 6180

Elta 6214

eMTech 6196

Energy Sistem 6247

Engel 6180, 6227

EP Sat 6176

Eurieult 6202

Eurocrypt 6176

EuroLine 6227

Europa 6236, 6255

Europhon 6256, 6229, 6255

Eurosat 6189

Eurosky 6256, 6213, 6229,

6236, 6255, 6230

Eurostar 6255, 6179

Eutelsat 6180

Eutra 6230

Evesham 6218

Exator 6200

Fagor 6203

Fenner 6180

Ferguson 6176, 6264, 6268,

6269

Fidelity 6236

Finlandia 6176

Finlux 6176, 6207, 6228

FinnSat 6230

Flair Mate 6180

Fly Com 6186

FMD 6213, 6244, 6186

Freecom 6236

FTEmaximal 6180, 6189

Fuba 6177, 6229, 6261, 6207,

6226, 6196

Galaxis 6220, 6267

Gardiner 6179

Garnet 6192

GbSAT 6196

Gecco 6246, 6199

General Satellite 6241

Globo 6230, 6227, 6238,

6199, 6257

GOD Digital 6214

Gold Box 6220, 6219

Gold Vision 6247

Golden Interstar 6250

Goodmans 6176, 6254,

6217, 6264, 6271, 6218, 6201,

6190

Gran Prix 6230

Granada 6176

Grandin 6228

Grocos 6239, 6186

Grundig 6220, 6177, 6217,

6264, 6232, 6218, 6201, 6190

Haensel & Gretel 6256

Haier 6245

Hama 6183

Hanseatic 6215, 6222

Hauppauge 6231, 6232

HB 6196

Heliocom 6255

Helium 6255

Hiro 6189

Hirschmann 6267, 6177,

6229, 6261, 6236, 6207, 6255,

6230, 6252, 6199, 6189

Hitachi 6176, 6217, 6218

HNE 6256

Hornet 6251

Houston 6261

Humax 6241, 6268, 6242

Huth 6256, 6255, 6192, 6193

Hyundai 6192

121

ID Digital 6241

ILLUSION sat 6247

Imperial 6222, 6216, 6223,

6238, 6232

Ingelen 6213, 6261

Inno Hit 6228

International 6256

Interstar 6196

Intervision 6255

Inves 6268

iotronic 6244

ITT Nokia 6176, 6207

Jaeger 6238

K-SAT 6180

Kamm 6180

Kaon 6251

KaTelco 6267

Kathrein 6177, 6214, 6213,

6262, 6200, 6180, 6179, 6272,

6183

Kendo 6252

Kenwood 6220

Key West 6256

Kiton 6213

KR 6200

Kreiling 6213, 6194, 6228

Kreiselmeyer 6177

Kyostar 6200

L&S Electronic 6256, 6238

Labgear 6195

LaSAT 6177, 6256, 6229,

6255, 6230

Leiko 6228

Lemon 6238

Lenco 6255, 6180

Lenson 6236

LG 6192

Lifesat 6256, 6229, 6180

Listo 6228

Lodos 6217

Logik 6217

Logix 6192

Lorenzen 6256, 6229, 6255,

6226, 6231, 6257, 6237

Luxor 6236, 6207, 6265

M Electronic 6179

Manata 6256, 6180

Manhattan 6176, 6251

Marantz 6214

Maspro 6177, 6180

Matsui 6177, 6217, 6271,

6228, 6268, 6269

Max 6255

Maximum 6192, 6238

Mediabox 6220, 6219

Mediacom 6198

MediaSat 6220, 6219, 6236,

6278, 6277

Medion 6256, 6229, 6180,

6230, 6192, 6252, 6238, 6199,

6228

Medison 6180

Mega 6214

MegaSat 6189

Metronic 6256, 6200, 6180,

6179, 6202, 6250, 6238, 6244

Metz 6177

Micro 6236, 6255, 6200,

6180, 6231

Micro Elektronic 6180

Micro Technology 6180

Micromaxx 6229

Microstar 6229, 6192, 6226

Microtec 6180

Mitsubishi 6176

Morgan’s 6214, 6256, 6180,

6252, 6199

Multibroadcast 6174

Multichoice 6174

Myryad 6214

Mysat 6180

MySky 6212, 6211

NEOTION 6238

Netsat 6263

Neuhaus 6236, 6255, 6180

Neuling 6256, 6252, 6257,

6188

Neusat 6180

Neveling 6226

Newton 6261

NextWave 6193

Nichimen 6254

Nikko 6214, 6180

Noda Electronic 6202

Nokia 6220, 6176, 6207, 6206

Nordmende 6176

Octagon 6200

OctalTV 6231

Onn 6217, 6218

Opentel 6252, 6199

Optex 6213, 6180, 6250,

6244, 6203, 6228

Orbis 6252, 6238, 6199

Orbitech 6213, 6236, 6215,

6222, 6216, 6223

P/Sat 6252

Pace 6220, 6214, 6176, 6181,

6273, 6212, 6211

Pacific 6217

Packard Bell 6267

Palcom 6229, 6226, 6239

Palladium 6261, 6236

Palsat 6236

Panasonic 6176, 6178

Panda 6177, 6176, 6255

Pansat 6191

Pass 6183

Patriot 6256

peeKTon 6186, 6245

Philips 6220, 6177, 6214,

6275, 6219, 6277, 6268, 6232,

6179, 6200, 6176, 6263

Phoenix 6245

Phonotrend 6233

Pilotime 6278

Pino 6238

Pixx 6191

Planet 6261

PMB 6180, 6203

Polytron 6261

Portland 6195

Preisner 6256, 6261, 6243,

6185

Premier 6219

Primacom 6267

Pro Basic 6220, 6184

Proline 6217

Promax 6176

Proscan 6234

Quelle 6229, 6255

Radiola 6214

Radix 6261, 6243

Rainbow 6200

RCA 6234

Rebox 6196

Regal 6227

RFT 6214

Roadstar 6220, 6180

Rollmaster 6244

Rover 6180

Rownsonic 6183

SAB 6227, 6251

Saba 6255, 6230, 6202, 6184

Sabre 6176

Sagem 6275, 6258, 6277

Saivod 6245

Salora 6252

Samsung 6220, 6198, 6197,

6273, 6253

Sanyo 6228

SAT 6236

Sat Control 6251

Sat Partner 6236, 6200

Sat Team 6180

SAT+ 6239

Satcom 6255

Satec 6180

Satelco 6252

Satplus 6222

SatyCon 6247

Schaecke 6200

Schaub Lorenz 6196, 6245

Schneider 6198, 6227

Schwaiger 6267, 6256, 6262,

6255, 6230, 6202, 6192, 6238,

6199, 6186, 6257, 6247, 6232,

6187, 6188

Scientific Atlanta 6209

SCS 6229, 6230

Sedea Electronique 6256,

6213, 6198, 6250, 6228

Seemann 6261

SEG 6213, 6192, 6227, 6217,

6228

Septimo 6202

Serd 6199

Servimat 6203

ServiSat 6180, 6227

Shark 6247

Sharp 6265, 6218

Siemens 6177, 6261, 6238

Sigmatek 6245

Silva 6229

SilverCrest 6187

Skantin 6180

SKR 6180

SKT 6256

SKY 6263, 6210, 6212, 6211

SKY Italia 6220, 6212

Sky XL 6227, 6199

Skymaster 6233, 6180, 6192,

6238, 6239, 6183, 6203, 6184

Skymax 6214, 6244

Skypex 6230

Skyplus 6230, 6252, 6238,

6199

SkySat 6213, 6236, 6255,

6180

Skyvision 6238

SL 6256, 6229, 6230, 6231,

6257, 6232

SM Electronic 6233, 6180,

6239

Smart 6256, 6261, 6180,

6243, 6252, 6246, 6244, 6257,

6247

SmartVision 6186

Sony 6235, 6220, 6219, 6176

SR 6256

Star Sat 6196

 

14

Additional information

Starland 6180

Starlite 6214

Stream 6212

Stream System 6251

Strong 6220, 6228, 6256,

6200, 6180, 6245, 6217, 6239

Sumin 6199

Sunny 6251

Sunsat 6180

Sunstar 6174, 6256

SuperMax 6193

Supratech 6244

Systec 6238

Tantec 6176

Targa 6191

Tatung 6176

TBoston 6227, 6245

Tecatel 6233

Technical 6228

Technika 6217, 6232, 6218

TechniSat 6213, 6261, 6176,

6236, 6215, 6222, 6216, 6223

Technomate 6250

Technosat 6193

Technosonic 6254, 6232

Technotrend 6232

Technowelt 6256, 6255

Techwood 6213, 6217, 6228,

6218

Telasat 6255

TELE System 6261, 6227,

6239, 6203

Teleciel 6200

Teleka 6261, 6236, 6255,

6200

Telesat 6255

Telestar 6213, 6236, 6215,

6222, 6216, 6223, 6227, 6238,

6228, 6232

Teletech 6213

Televes 6256, 6176, 6236,

6196, 6251, 6238, 6257

Telewire 6252

Tempo 6193

Tevion 6254, 6180, 6239,

6232, 6184

Thomson 6220, 6219, 6180,

6255, 6176, 6265, 6277, 6234,

6264, 6210, 6212

Thorn 6176

Tiny 6232

Tioko 6256

Titan 6189, 6184

TNT SAT 6258

Tokai 6214

Tonna 6176, 6236, 6180,

6203

Topfield 6198

Toshiba 6176, 6217

Trevi 6227

Triasat 6236

Triax 6220, 6214, 6256, 6189,

6253, 6228, 6203, 6261, 6213,

6257, 6244, 6195, 6264, 6227,

6243, 6180, 6236

Turnsat 6180

Twinner 6180, 6203

Unisat 6214, 6256

United 6227

Univers 6189

Universum 6177, 6213,

6229, 6255, 6230, 6215, 6227

Van Hunen 6226

Variosat 6177

VEA 6245

Ventana 6214

Vestel 6213, 6227, 6217,

6218

VH Sat 6229

Viasat 6273

Viola Digital 6232

Vision 6228, 6189

Visionic 6250

Visiosat 6213, 6254, 6180,

6244, 6186, 6191

Vitecom 6244

Volcasat 6245

VTech 6179

Wetekom 6236

Wewa 6176

Wharfedale 6217, 6265,

6218

Wisi 6177, 6256, 6229, 6261,

6176, 6236, 6255, 6230, 6252,

6199

Worldsat 6213, 6196, 6227,

6194

WorthIt! 6190

Woxter 6245

Xoro 6191

Xsat 6180, 6196, 6181

Xtreme 6251

Yakumo 6244

ZapMaster 6230

Zehnder 6213, 6262, 6179,

6192, 6252, 6227, 6238, 6199,

6244, 6247, 6249

Zeta Technology 6214

Zodiac 6261, 6200

Cable Set Top Box

Pioneer 6205, 6325, 6328,

6329

ABC 6266

ADB 6175

Auna 6175

Austar 6276

Bell & Howell 6266

Birmingham Cable

Communications 6276

Cablecom 6270

Fosgate 6276

France Telecom 6260

Freebox 6274

General Instrument 6276,

6266

Humax 6224, 6248

Jerrold 6276, 6266

Kabel Deutschland 6224

Macab 6260

Madritel 6175

Magnavox 6266

Memorex 6240

Motorola 6276

Nokia 6208

Noos 6260

NTL 6276, 6221

Optus 6276

Orange 6260

Pace 6221

Panasonic 6240

Paragon 6240

Philips 6260, 6270

Pulsar 6240

Runco 6240

Sagem 6260

Salora 6240

Samsung 6221, 6240

Scientific Atlanta 6225

StarHub 6276

Cable Set Top Box (Cable/PVR Combination)

Freebox 6274

Humax 6248, 6224

Nokia 6208

Scientific Atlanta 6225

Telewest 6225

Thomson 6270

CD-R

Pioneer 5001, 5053, 5071

Philips 5054

Yamaha 5055

Satellite Set Top Box (SAT/PVR Combination)

@sat 6251

Allvision 6199

Atsat 6251

B@ytronic 6230, 6199

Boca 6187

BskyB 6210

Bush 6254

Canal Satellite 6278

Comag 6199, 6187

Daewoo 6182

Digifusion 6269

Digihome 6218

DigiQuest 6251

Digital 6187

DMT 6192

Edision 6247

eMTech 6196

GbSAT 6196

Gecco 6199

Globo 6199

Goodmans 6254, 6218

Hirschmann 6230, 6199

Humax 6241, 6242

Huth 6192

Hyundai 6192

Kathrein 6272

LaSAT 6230

LG 6192

Luxor 6265

Maximum 6238

Mediacom 6198

MediaSat 6277

Medion 6230, 6199

Microstar 6192

Morgan’s 6199

MySky 6212, 6211

NEOTION 6238

Nichimen 6254

Nokia 6206

Opentel 6199

Orbis 6199

Pace 6273, 6211

Panasonic 6178

Philips 6263, 6277

Pilotime 6278

Pixx 6191

Proscan 6234

Rebox 6196

Sagem 6258

Samsung 6198, 6197, 6273

Sat Control 6251

Schneider 6198

Schwaiger 6230, 6192, 6199,

6187

Sedea Electronique 6198

Serd 6199

Sharp 6218

SilverCrest 6187

SKY 6210, 6212, 6211

SKY Italia 6212

Sky XL 6199

Skymaster 6192

Skypex 6230

Skyplus 6230, 6238, 6199

Stream System 6251

Sumin 6199

Sunny 6251

Targa 6191

TechniSat 6216, 6223

Technosonic 6254

Telestar 6216, 6223

Thomson 6210, 6265

TNT SAT 6258

Topfield 6198

Viasat 6273

Visiosat 6254, 6191

Wisi 6230

Xoro 6191

Xtreme 6251

Zehnder 6192, 6199, 6249

Laser Disc Player

Pioneer 5002, 5003, 5004, 5005, 5006, 5007, 5008, 5009, 5010

Cassete Deck

Pioneer 5058, 5059

Digital Tape

Pioneer 5057

MD

Pioneer 5056

Network Audio Player

Pioneer 5063

Game

X-Box 2313

AV Receiver

Pioneer 5096 (ID 1), 5097 (ID 2), 5098 (ID 3), 5099 (ID 4),

122

Supercable 6276

Telewest 6225

Thomson 6270, 6224

Toshiba 6240

UPC 6270

US Electronics 6276

Virgin Media 6225, 6221

Visiopass 6260

Zenith 6240

Ziggo 6208

 

UPC 6270

Virgin Media 6225

PIONEER HOME ELECTRONICS CORPORATION

1-1, Shin-ogura, Saiwai-ku, Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa 212-0031, Japan

PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.

P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404

PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.

340 Ferrier Street, Unit 2, Markham, Ontario L3R 2Z5, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411

PIONEER EUROPE NV

Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11

PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.

253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555

PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.

5 Arco Lane, Heatherton, Victoria, 3202, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300

PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.

Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270

K002_B3_En

© 2014 PIONEER HOME ELECTRONICS CORPORATION.

All rights reserved.

<ARB7571-A>

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents